AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

Click the Help button. in conjunction with Tooltips. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. regarding selected components within a view. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. In the Status Bar. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. click Modify. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. Windows: From any window. If there is no Help button displayed. find a keyword on the Index tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. click Autodesk Revit Help. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. click . Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. You can also press SHIFT+F1. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. There are several tools that help you find information. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. It highlights when the cursor is over it. You can use this tri-pane. 18 On the Design Bar. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. When you place the cursor over a component. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view.In the bottom left corner of the window. 20 Press TAB. In this case. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. The Status Bar also provides information. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows.

you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. floors. review the tutorial. You should understand the user interface. you create the shell of the west wing . This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. Understanding the Concepts. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. Therefore. and then add the passageway between them.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. 11 . this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. For training purposes. common terms. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. and a roof . For learning purposes. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. stairs. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. doors. If you have not already done so. While creating your first building information model.including all windows. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. all views and schedules instantly update.mirror it to create the east wing. before proceeding further.

Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. and a roof. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. After adding dimensions. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. and double-click North. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. click Level. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. you add and modify doors and windows. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Elevations. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can. Finally. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. at a later time. click the Training Files icon. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. Using the mirror tool. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. Open m_First_Project. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. In this exercise. When you create walls. stairs.rvt located in the Metric folder. You then add sketched components such as floors. After sketching the walls. modify. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . ceilings. you use the west wing to create the east wing. you create. and then add the passageway between them. As you design the walls. click Open. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. and apply new wall types. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined.

■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. it toggles to 2D. click Modify. ■ Select .3 On the Options Bar. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. In the Project Browser. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. the datum is in model extent mode. With the 3D designation. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. When you click Modify. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. it terminates the command in progress. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. In this view. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . This means that if you move the extents of one level line. When you select Level 4. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you click the 3D control. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. 8 Select Level 4.

there are four elevation symbols. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. In such a case. 12 In the Project Browser. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. double-click Level 1. a west wing. and South elevation views. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. tool on the toolbar. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. In this view. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . which define the East. use the wheel on your mouse.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. mirroring it to create the east wing. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. West. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. Theoretically. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. In the steps that follow. However. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. North. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing.

Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. click Wall. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. 18 In the Type Selector. and South elevation views are inactive. click the Elevation: West symbol.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. West. 16 In the drawing area. Do not click the symbol. North. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. select Basic Wall: Exterior . For training purposes. you use this command to modify the view. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. Later in this tutorial. This means that each view is infinite. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time.Brick on CMU.

22 Select the left. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height.000 mm wide and 24. you can flip the wall orientation. The selected wall is red. Also notice the dimension that displays. This is a temporary dimension. TIP If necessary. as shown. ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. vertical wall of the rectangle. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. click Modify. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. Select the drawing tool. and click to complete the rectangle. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. 24 On the View toolbar. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. By clicking the arrows.000 mm long. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids.19 In the Options Bar. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. . click . you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

You do not need to enter 12000 mm. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. In addition. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . TIP When entering a value. you do not need to type the metric suffix. For example.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall.

click the Model Graphics Style control. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. click the Model Graphics Style control. 29 Draw a region around the corner. Notice the wall remains selected. including the brick surface pattern displays. as shown. and click Shading with Edges. 32 On the keyboard. Notice the material settings. click Zoom in Region. 33 On the View Control Bar.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. it is displayed as solid fill. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. and click Hidden Line. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. The brick surface pattern displays. enter ZF.

you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. you can see the list of type parameters. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. For example. it has no effect on components that are not selected. which control all components of the same type. 35 On the Options Bar. which control the selected component or components. only the wall that you selected would change. and then apply it to the remaining walls. If you change an instance parameter. In the steps that follow. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. modify it. In the upper half of the dialog box. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. click . You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. you create a new wall type. For example. To accomplish this. However.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters.

the original wall type must remain unchanged. Exterior . You can specify the sample height to any value you want. click Duplicate. 38 In the Name dialog box. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . enter the new wall name. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. For training purposes.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. click Preview.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Edit. Therefore. click Edit/New. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 13500 for Sample Height. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under the Value column for Structure. and click OK.

click Sweeps. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. Make sure the offset is a negative number. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. select layer 9. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. When you select a layer. 49 Under Layers. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. under Name. 42 Under the preview pane. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Click inside the Material field.Brick Soldier Course. select Section: Modify type attributes. In the Materials dialog box.0 mm for Offset. select Masonry .Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. click Add. This should be the interior finish layer. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. Verify that Base is selected for From. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. and click OK. Enter -50. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. for View.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click Add. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. click Sweeps. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 58 Click Add. 53 Click OK. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. 57 Click Apply.Brick Soldier Course for Material. 52 For the second wall sweep. and click OK. click Add. click Reveals. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. under Modify Vertical Structure. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Verify that Base is selected for From. Select Masonry . Select Flip. Make sure it is a negative number. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Verify that the Offset is zero. Enter -50 mm for Offset.

62 In the Type Properties dialog box. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. 66 On the View toolbar. click OK. Verify that Base is selected for From. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . click OK. click Modify. Verify that the Offset is zero. click .59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. 60 Click OK. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click OK. 64 On the Design Bar. Select Flip. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 65 On the View menu.

Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. 73 On the File menu. click Save As.rvt. TIP To select multiple components. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. 72 On the Design Bar. This turns off thin lines globally. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. They do not have sweeps or reveals. and click Shading with Edges. 71 In the Type Selector. you add the interior walls of the west wing. 68 Enter ZF. and click Save.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course.Brick on CMU. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. click Modify.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. Notice that. Exterior . click . Also notice the button remains activated. 69 On the View toolbar. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. When finished. click the Model Graphics Style control. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . after the new wall type is applied. 67 On the View Control Bar.

3 In the Type Selector.135mm Partition (2-hr). under Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. place the cursor over the north wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 . Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. m_First_Project-in_progress. . select Basic Wall: Interior . 4 In the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor down. under Floor Plans. click Wall. and click.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. Select the Line sketching tool. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide.

TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. If you zoom into the model. Click to specify the wall start point. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the snap values decrease.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. and select the second interior wall. press and hold CTRL. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 8 Move the cursor down. click Modify. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls.

This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. specify the selection color. click the Graphics tab. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor.After the walls are selected. On the Settings menu.79mm Partition (1-hr). they display as red. click Modify. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected. click a temporary dimension value. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. and under Colors. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Basic Wall: Interior . click Activate Dimensions. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. click Wall. 15 In the Type Selector. select Options. and enter 4750 mm.

17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. If necessary. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. as shown.

NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. 23 In the drawing area.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. you can click on the View toolbar. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. click . This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. After splitting the wall. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. 24 Click to split the wall. This places the view in thin lines mode. 20 Enter ZR. click Modify. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. As you move the cursor over the wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . When you are finished splitting the walls. and you can now split walls and lines. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. In the above illustration and callout.

30 Enter ZF. split the right corridor wall. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and delete the segment.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 27 On the Standard toolbar. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. click . 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. click Modify.

the inner segment is deleted automatically. Zoom in as necessary. select Delete Inner Segment. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. click 36 On the View toolbar. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. 31 On the Tools toolbar. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. 35 On the View toolbar. .There are two remaining splits to make. click . click . This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. After the second split. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. 32 On the Options Bar.

In that case. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. This is the aligned dimension option. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. Dimensioning the Building Model. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. under Views (all). you add dimension lines to the building model. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification.2.38 On the File menu. 2 In the Project Browser. Next. ■ ■ For Prefer. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Level 1 .5mm Arial. select Wall centerlines. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. right-click Level 1. click Dimension. enter Level 1 . right-click Copy of Level 1. m_First_Project-in_progress. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . should be open. and click OK. ready for modification. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The floor plan. 39 Proceed to the next exercise.Dimensioned and Annotated. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. In the final section of this exercise. When geometry is selected for modification. For Pick. When you duplicate a view. options. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. click Rename. under Floor Plans. and components that require dimensioning. select Individual References. 5 On the Options Bar. and in the context menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 6 In the Type Selector. and click Duplicate. click Save. under Floor Plans.rvt. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints.Dimensioned and Annotated. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls.

move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall.7 In the drawing area. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. 10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . click to select it.

and press ENTER. and press ENTER. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. change it to 15000. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the dimension value displays as modifiable. change it to 4750. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. and a blue padlock displays. Information is displayed in a tooltip. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. on each witness line.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. indicating that the control moves the witness line. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. 12 Select the dimension line. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. In its current state. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. the value is not available for modification. 17 Click the temporary dimension value. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. or in the status bar of the drawing window. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. Notice the dimension value turns blue. Controls display on the value. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line.

Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. click Dimension. exterior wall. and click to place the dimension as shown. Click Options. For Pick. click Modify. select Entire Walls. select Intersecting Walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. vertical. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. 23 Select the left. and click OK. select Wall centerlines. move the cursor to the left. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent.

Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. and click Delete Witness Line.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top. click Modify. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.

click Edit Witness Lines. 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line.27 Right-click the dimension line. it provides a different set of options on the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . and in the context menu. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line.

29 After selecting the wall. or press ESC on the keyboard. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor.

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall.

The relationship between these components is constrained.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. if you move one component. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. Notice a lock displays for each segment. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. This dimension does not need to be precise. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment.

You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. select Save. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. In the final section of the exercise. double-click Level 1. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. You begin by adding single flush doors. Next. under Views (all). under Other. Adding Doors and Windows. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. 41 On the File menu. click .Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. you add doors and windows to the building model. 40 In the Project Browser. select Value for Equality Display. 38 On the Options Bar. and click OK. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal.

click Door. m_First_Project-in_progress. the door resides on a level line. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. however. When you add a door. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. You can offset the door from the level. Do not click at this time. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. 3 In the north side of the building model. Regardless of the initial placement. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. 2 In the Type Selector. In addition. This is the mechanical room. doors snap automatically to the closest available level.rvt. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches.

Do not be concerned with exact placement. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). When you are finished. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. Press the Spacebar a second time. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. specify a value of 600 mm. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. Notice the blue controls that display. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . After you add door number 2. and press ENTER. The precise dimensions are not important.

14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify.rfa. and select M_Double-Glass 2. as shown. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Flip the door.rfa extension. click Door. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. All Revit Building families have an . 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Training Files. and set the temporary dimensions. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. to zoom to fit. click Load. 17 Press and hold CTRL. ZF.rfa. and select M_Double-Flush. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder.

You can load multiple families at the same time. When more than one family is selected. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. 20 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. as shown. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. 18 Press and hold CTRL. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. Each door should open into the room. 22 In the Type Selector. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. a preview image does not display.rfa. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm.

46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. This is door number 13 in the following illustration.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. 26 In the Type Selector. The arrow has been added for training purposes. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. This is door number 14 in the following illustration.

31 Click the Model Categories tab. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . and clear Surface Pattern.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. select Visibility/Graphics. If your view displays solid fill. under Views (all). Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. and scroll down to Walls. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. double-click North. 32 Expand the Walls category. under Elevations. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. 30 On the View menu. zoom in until the brick pattern displays.

48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. You can apply an offset if required. Notice the door snaps to each level. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. under Floor Plans. In this case. When adding a door. as shown. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. double-click Level 1.33 Click OK. then Level 2. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. click Door. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. and down to Level 1. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3.

the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. clear Leader. click Tag. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 41 On the upper exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. as shown. click Door. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. 44 In the Type Selector. 40 On the Options Bar. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. TIP For each component type. This should be door number 15. click the double doors to add a tag.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. Like doors. the window displays at the cursor. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 47 On the View toolbar. click Window. 54 In the Type Selector. . just like doors. click . As you move the cursor over a wall. click Save. click 48 On the View toolbar. 49 Spin the model. under Floor Plans.46 On the Design Bar. Windows are wall-hosted components. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 50 On the File menu. you can flip the window after placement. and notice the doors you added. click Modify.

modify it. 59 Zoom around the window. and reload it into the project. click to place it as shown. In this project. click Window. In the family editor. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. and visibility. elevation. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . 58 On the View toolbar. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. and 3D views. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. materials. IMPORTANT  If necessary. When you add a window in a plan view. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. as shown. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. click Cancel. 57 On the Design Bar. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. click . Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. 61 On the Options Bar. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. click Modify. go to Help. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. click . and select it. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall.You can add windows in plan.

The copy option is selected by default. press and hold CTRL. In this case. When you mirror a component or components. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. click to select it. 70 On the Edit menu. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. A tooltip is displayed. and click to set the mirror axis. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. click Mirror. and make sure Copy is selected.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the three remaining windows. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. click Modify. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. 74 Move the cursor to the left. 71 On the Options Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . you can pick or draw the mirror axis.

Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. 76 On the Design Bar.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. You tag the windows later in the exercise. at the dimensions shown. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. click Window. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 .

82 On the Options Bar. You first click a point to specify the array start point. and click to set the array end point. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. Enter 5 for Number. select 2nd. You then move the array to the second or last location. Select Constrain. For Move To. Clear Group And Associate. click Array. click Modify. you can use the array tool to finish the job. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click to set the array start point. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. Creating an array is a three-step process.78 On the Design Bar. 81 On the Edit menu. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. it is an ideal situation to use an array.

undo the step and try again. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . If you make a mistake placing the array. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. as shown. click Window.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall.

click . drag a selection box around the entire building model. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. 92 In the 3D Drawing area. click 89 On the View toolbar. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. and notice the windows you added. click Modify. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . on the View toolbar. Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. . 90 Spin the model.

click . select Level 2. 101 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier.This selects every component in the building model. 94 In the Filter dialog box. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. 104 On the Design Bar. 96 On the Edit menu. 98 On the Design Bar. 99 In the Project Browser. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . double-click North. click Copy to Clipboard. click Window. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. notice the wall surface pattern displays. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 103 In the Project Browser. click Window. clear walls and doors from the selection. 93 On the Options Bar. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. press and hold CTRL. double-click South. and click OK. under Elevations. select Level 3. In this view. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. such as equality constraints. 95 On the Edit menu. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. and click OK. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below.

Adding Floors and Floor Openings. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.rvt. Floors. Like walls. under Floor Plans. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged. 110 On the File menu.106 In the Project Browser. each of these components can have a compound structure. When walls intersect a floor. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. and all require their borders to be sketched. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. You can also select or draw lines. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. roof. m_First_Project-in_progress. . and click OK. click Save. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. double-click Level 1. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. When sketching these components. you can select walls to define the border of the component. select Window Tags. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. click 2 On the View toolbar. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . or ceiling. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. roofs.

4 In the Project Browser. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. click Finish Sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. click Floor. click . 12 Select Concrete . verify that Pick Walls is selected. 14 On the View toolbar. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Properties. Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. clear Extend into wall (to core). In addition. under Floor Plans. and click OK.300mm for Type. The Design Bar now has only one tab. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. 7 On the Options Bar. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. double-click Level 1. click the flip arrows to flip the line. When in sketch mode. You are in sketch mode. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 .

when it highlights under the cursor. click Floor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. In this view. When the chain of walls highlights. double-click Level 2. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. press TAB. Notice the location of the magenta line. 17 On the Options Bar.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click to select it. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall.

The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. as shown. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. These elevators are wall-hosted components. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. under Floor Plans. move the elevator into position. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. After you add these components. 22 On the Design Bar. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. 27 On the View toolbar. click . 24 Click Finish Sketch. click 28 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . double-click Level 1. 32 In the Type Selector. the walls remain attached. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. . indicating that they are not attached to the floor. and click to place it. click Floor Properties. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. To do this. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. position the cursor on the wall. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls.20 Click the flip arrows. click Component. Next.

37 In the Type Selector. select each one.TIP After adding the elevators. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. click Modify. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. 36 On the Design Bar. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. as shown. click Component. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model.

39 On the Design Bar. when rotating the component. 41 On the Edit menu. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. In this case. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. For example. Rotating an object requires two clicks. When rotating. click Rotate. when you sketch a wall. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . The component will rotate to the value. click Modify. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. 40 Select the sink. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. The first click specifies the rotation start point. establish the direction of the rotation. the second click specifies the rotation end point.

45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 46 In the Type Selector. as shown. select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. click Component.

Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . doors. 54 On the Edit menu. right-click. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. the interior walls.) This captures all the internal walls. 52 On the Options Bar. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. 53 In the Filter dialog box. 55 On the Edit menu. and components.Before adding the final floor. and click OK. elevators. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. doors. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In addition. clear Door Tags. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. 56 Select Level 2. click Copy to Clipboard. and click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. click . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK.

you are prompted to select the floor. click . roof. click 62 On the View toolbar. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. In the steps that follow. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. 57 In the Project Browser. If you know the source of the problem. or ceiling in which you want the opening. When you add a model opening.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. 61 On the View toolbar. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. if necessary. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. double-click Level 2. Therefore. . you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. under Floor Plans. 58 If you received the conflict message. For more information regarding the warning. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. If you received this error.

65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. click Section. Adding a section is a two-click process. double-click Level 1. and the second click specifies the section tail.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. 68 Click the section line. under Floor Plans. and click Zoom To Fit. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. The first click specifies the section head. click to set the start point. After you add the section. 70 Using the shape handles. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. as shown. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view.

the referenced view opens. select Pick a roof. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. or ceiling and cut vertically. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Similarly. floor. 72 Double-click the section head. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The section head is displayed in blue. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. when it highlights. just as the level heads do in an elevation view.71 On the Design Bar. select it. click Opening. and click OK. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right.

79 On the Options Bar. 78 On the Design Bar. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 .Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. select the rectangle drawing tool. Notice the locking constraints that display. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. and click Open View. In the following illustration. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. click Lines. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. When locked.

89 On the Design Bar. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. select it. double-click Section 1. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. select the rectangle drawing tool. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. and click Open View. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Sections (Building Section). it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. 82 On the Design Bar. click Opening. select Pick a roof. click Lines. 83 In the Project Browser. floor.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 92 Click Finish Sketch. or ceiling and cut vertically. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. 90 On the Options Bar. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. click Finish Sketch.

96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 .Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. 100 On the Options Bar. floor. click Lines. 99 On the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. and click Open View. select it. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. when it highlights. select Floor Plan: Level 2. select the rectangle drawing tool. . under Sections (Building Section). 98 Zoom in to the elevators. click Opening. and click OK. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. or ceiling and cut vertically. 94 On the Design Bar. You have completed the three openings required for this level. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 102 Click Finish Sketch. double-click Section 1. After adding a floor to Level 3. click . 103 On the View toolbar. click 104 On the View toolbar. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown.

112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. under Sections (Building Sections). under Floor Plans. and click Zoom To Fit. 116 On the Options Bar. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. click . under Views (all). 118 On the Edit menu. click to select it. 119 On the Edit menu. when the chain of walls highlights. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. 107 Right-click. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 111 On the Design Bar. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. and. press TAB. when the wall highlights under the cursor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. click Copy to Clipboard. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. Make sure you do not select Floors. double-click Section 1. 117 In the Filter dialog box. 109 On the Options Bar. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). click Floor. double-click Level 3. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

and components to Level 3. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). 123 Right-click. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2.121 On the View toolbar. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. Do not include the exterior walls. doors. click . The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. and click Zoom To Fit.

133 Proceed to the next exercise. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. this removes it from the selection set. and click OK. click Save. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. hold the CTRL key down and select it. click Copy to Clipboard.TIP If you miss a component. 126 On the Options Bar. 128 On the Edit menu. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. 131 On the View toolbar. 127 In the Filter dialog box. 129 On the Edit menu. 132 On the File menu. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. click . NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. click .

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). m_First_Project-in_progress. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Options Bar.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. double-click Roof. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. clear Defines slope. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. select Defines slope. under Floor Plans. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. 3 On the Design Bar. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear.rvt. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls.

10 In the Element Properties dialog box.Timber for Type. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 12 On the View toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. select Warm Roof . 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. . and click OK. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. click Roof Properties.9 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click . click 13 On the View toolbar. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof.

The exterior walls attach to the roof. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. 19 On the Options Bar. for Top/Base. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. select Attach. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . 20 Select the roof. for Attach Wall. select Top. 18 On the Options Bar. The exterior wall chain displays as solid red.

Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. This returns the roof to its original position. 29 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 3. 25 On the Design Bar.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. 26 On the Edit menu. you will use the auto ceiling method. click Modify. ■ In this case. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. click Ceiling. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. under Views (all). 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. under Ceiling Plans. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. click Undo Move. Using the sketch method.

32 In the Type Selector. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . as shown. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms.

click Modify. click Properties. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. click the Model Graphics Style control. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 36 On the Design Bar. and from the context menu. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 38 On the View Control Bar. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. 37 In the drawing area. double-click the section head. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 On the File menu. and click OK. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. click Save. under Constraints.34 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. select Compound Ceiling: Plain.

Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. 5 Add the three lines as shown. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. In the image below. m_First_Project-in_progress. select Wide Lines. under Views (all). 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. 4 In the Type Selector. click Lines. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . In the steps that follow. under Floor Plans. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. double-click Level 1.

NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. not to the centerline. You are in sketch mode. click Stairs. The dimensions have been predetermined. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. In the steps that follow. the Run tool is active. for example: 550 mm. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line. and then specify the value. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. By default. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. select 900mm Pipe. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Railings Type. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar.The stair run is complete.

16 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. 15 Delete the three model lines. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 12 Select the stairs. click the Hide/Isolate control. and select Hide Object. click the Hide/Isolate control.Notice that the model lines still display. 14 Select the three model lines. This makes the model lines more apparent.

and click OK. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. under Sections (Building Section). click . click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . Use TAB or zoom in. under Views (all). select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. as needed. double-click Section 1. under Constraints.17 In the Project Browser. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar.

click . click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. and select Copy. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . SM.NOTE At this time. click Mirror. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. 24 On the Options Bar. Do not select the railings. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. as shown. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. 23 On the Edit menu. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. click Save. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. click Close. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. click Modify. click 30 On the File menu. . 29 On the View toolbar.28 On the Design Bar. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. 31 On the File menu.

Additional 3D views were added. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. click the Training Files icon. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. 3 In the Project Browser. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. click Ref Plane.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If necessary. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. Stair railings on Level 3 were added.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Views (all). NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . expand 3D Views. click Open. zoom out before making the selection. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 8 On the Options Bar. click and verify that Copy is selected. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 .The entire model displays as selected. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 7 On the Edit menu. double-click Level 1. and select the section line to add it to the selection set. click Mirror. 5 In the Project Browser.

14 On the View toolbar. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. double-click Level 1. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 20 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. under Floor Plans. click Delete. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. as shown. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated.After you specify the mirror axis. click 15 On the View toolbar. select Roof for Height. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. click Modify on the Design Bar. 13 On the Edit menu. click Wall. 11 If necessary. . notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. The new components are numbered sequentially. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the reference plane. In addition. If necessary. click . Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. 19 In the Type Selector. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser.

26 Using the same technique. 24 On the Options Bar. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 .Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Tools menu. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. click . click Split Walls and Lines. When splitting the wall. select Delete Inner Segment. as shown below. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall.

Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. click Split Walls and Lines. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 30 On the Options Bar.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. 29 On the Tools menu. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall.

double-click Level 1. 38 On the Options Bar. and clear Extend into wall (to core). Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 35 In the Project Browser. click Modify. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . click Floor. to turn off thin lines mode. under Floor Plans. click .31 Using the technique learned previously. click 34 On the View toolbar. 32 On the Design Bar. 33 On the View toolbar. Arrows refer to each split location. enter 150 for Offset. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall.

notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. When finished. 46 On the Design Bar. click the rectangle drawing tool. 52 On the Options Bar. click Floor Properties. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. 48 Click Finish Sketch.40 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Options Bar. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. In this case. double-click Level 2. click Trim/Extend. NOTE In the following image. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. When sketching. dimensions have been added for training purposes. In the following illustration. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. . click Lines. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. click Lines. click and Lock. 43 On the Tools menu. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 51 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Floor Plans. click Floor. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method.

If necessary. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 63 On the Design Bar. click and . and click OK. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. as shown.54 On the Design Bar. 65 On the Design Bar. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 59 On the Options Bar. If they do. TIP When sketching. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. select 1100mm for Type. click Lines. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 66 Select the railing. 56 Click Finish Sketch. click . click Railing. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. 61 On the Options Bar. 58 On the Design Bar. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. click Floor Properties. click Railing Properties. and click OK.

68 On the Options Bar. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . however. click and Copy. click Modify.67 On the Edit menu. as shown. 69 Enter SM. move the cursor to the right. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. continuous line. click Section. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. 75 In the section view. only midpoints will be snapped to. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. 73 On the Design Bar. it is faster to mirror it. For the next mouse click. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. and modify the direction and shape handles. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to set the mirror axis. click Mirror. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway.

78 In the Select Levels dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . double-click Roof. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm.76 On the Edit menu. select Level 3. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. 81 Using the zoom commands. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. and click OK. check Defines slope. under Floor Plans. If necessary. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. 79 On the View toolbar. 77 On the Edit menu. Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. 83 On the Options Bar. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. click Copy to Clipboard. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint.

click . as shown. clear Defines slope. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. click Trim/Extend. Exact dimensions are not important. 91 On the View toolbar. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click Finish Roof. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 90 On the Design Bar. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines.85 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 86 On the Options Bar. 88 On the Tools menu. as shown.

and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. First. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. 93 On the Tools menu. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. Second. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. The two roofs are joined. click Join/Unjoin Roof. click the Model Graphics Style control. For training purposes. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. In this case. you select the edge of the passageway roof. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. and click Hidden Line. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing.

rename each schedule. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. you duplicate the schedule twice. 100 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 101 On the File menu. and select Shading with Edges. click Join/Unjoin Roof. click . Scheduling the Building Model. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. you create and modify a door schedule. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify it to filter by level. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click Save.rvt. 98 On the Tools menu. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Finally. click Save As. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. After creating the schedule.96 On the View toolbar. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory.

Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. and click Add. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. Select Text for Type. 4 From the Available Fields list. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. TIP If the View tab is not visible. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). Select Common for Discipline. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. on the Fields tab. select Family and Type under Available Fields. enter Hardware for Name. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . Select Other for Group parameter under. select Doors for category. select Project parameter. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 5 Click Add Parameter. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. Under Parameter Data. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Instance. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. and click OK.

102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Therefore. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 25 Click OK. 20 Select Right for Alignment. 22 Under Field formatting. and under Field Formatting.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 14 At the bottom of the tab. 16 Click the Formatting tab. select Family and Type. select Header and select Footer. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. The door schedule displays. 24 Select Bold for Header text. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. select Level. select Cost. 26 In the door schedule. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. select Hidden field. 17 Under Fields. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 21 Under Fields. the column is redundant. 19 Under Fields. select Calculate totals. On the schedule. 13 Under Sort by. 12 Select Level for Sort by. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety.

33 In the Rename View dialog box. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. and click Properties. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. enter 500. 35 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. You now have a separate schedule for each level. and click Duplicate. click Edit for the Filter value. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. However. A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. right-click Door Schedule. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . under Other.TIP In this view. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 28 Click OK. enter Brass. each door is allowed a different value. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. expand Schedules/Quantities. right-click Door Schedule. 32 In the Project Browser. Cost is a type parameter. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. and press ENTER. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. This is because for this door type. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities.

Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. click Save. 40 In the Project Browser. 41 On the File menu. Filter each schedule by their respective level. Under Type. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. modify the settings. click OK. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 4 Click OK. you create an exterior scene. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you capture the image and save it within the project. and then render a 3D view using that scene. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Exterior. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. After rendering.rvt. click Settings. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. click . 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. Rendering the Building Model. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click each door schedule.

click OK. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. A color bar displays. select Solid Color. 11 In the Environment dialog box. select Good for Quality. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . and B settings. 7 Click the color bar. This is a white background color. click Environment. click the Bars tab. G.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 6 In the Environment dialog box. under Background Color. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. under Scene Settings. click Region Raytrace. the building model should resemble the following illustration. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. This is the background color for the scene. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. under Scene Settings. 10 Click OK. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. click . 15 On the View toolbar. When the rendering process is complete.

An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. and double-click {3D}. In the next exercise. 22 On the File menu. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet.19 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. you add this to a sheet. expand Renderings. click Capture Rendering. Documenting the Building Model. On the second sheet. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 21 In the Project Browser. click Save. click Display Model. 23 Proceed to the final exercise.

The blue text is text that you can modify. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter your name. and press ENTER. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. click Metric Library. click Sheet. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. 9 Click Owner.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component. The text is not selectable by design. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. click Load. 5 Click Cancel. You are prompted to select a titleblock.

In this case.10 On the Settings menu. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. If you add views of different scales. and click Add View to Sheet. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. the label displays As Indicated. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 14 In the Views dialog box. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and click OK. click Add View. referring the reader to the view titles. click Project Information.

23 Select the view. clear Elevations. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. click Deactivate View. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 17 Right-click the view. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. However. 20 Under Visibility. 18 On the View menu. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. and click OK. click Modify. You can work on the building model within this view. and on the context menu. Notice the elevation symbols display. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . 21 Right-click the view. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. click Visibility/Graphics. click Activate View. and on the context menu.16 On the Design Bar.

under Schedules/Quantities. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. Notice that the scale value has updated.

adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 .29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. 30 Using the column drag handles.

34 In the Project Browser. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. 35 In the Project Browser. click Sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevations). If necessary. under Renderings. If you click this. Because these two views have different view scales. click Close. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 36 On the File menu. 37 On the File menu. the Scale label displays As Indicated. notice the z symbol in the center edge. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. You have completed your first building model.TIP When the schedule is selected. click Save. click OK to use the default titleblock. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the schedule breaks in half. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. modify the location and width of the view titles.

you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. and set it as your default template. you modify the system environment. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. which is independent of the project settings. In the first lesson. you create an office template. In the second lesson. Finally. 113 .

click Options. click Browse. under Template file. click OK. 13 In the Color dialog box. 5 On the File menu. click Options. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Modify. journal cleanup options. and select the wall. 19 On the Design Bar. the elements causing the error display using this color. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 6 In the New Project dialog box. click Close to close all open projects. and click OK. notification preferences. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. 15 Under Notifications. 2 On the Settings menu. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. click the Graphics tab. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. Notice that the drawing area is black. selection default options. 4 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. select yellow. These settings control the graphics. click Wall. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. When an error occurs. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. and click Open. 9 In the New Project dialog box.rte in the Metric folder. 10 On the Settings menu. select Invert background color. and your username when using worksets. 16 Click OK. they are not saved to project or template files. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. 14 Click the General tab. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Options dialog box. click Training Files. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 11 In the Options dialog box. 12 Under Colors. click the value for Selection Color. and click OK.

click Options. Specifying File Locations. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. click No. 29 In the Options dialog box. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. clear Invert background color. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. the family libraries. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. 25 On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. If prompted. Under Username. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Under Journal File Cleanup. click Close. Your login name displays by default. the family template files. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. 24 When prompted to save. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. Select Red for Selection Color. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. click Modify. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. Modifying System Settings | 115 . Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 20 On the Design Bar. 23 On the File menu. do not save the changes. 28 On the Settings menu. click Open. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. click the Training Files icon. you specify your default file locations. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 27 Open the m_Settings. 32 On the File menu. 31 Click OK. click Close. These files are used primarily in the software support process.

and Import dialog boxes. 4 Click Cancel. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. and click Browse to select a template. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. under Libraries. click Browse. 10 Under Libraries. you can start a new project with that template. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. Load. You can modify the existing library names and path. 5 Under Default path for user files. This path is set automatically during the installation process.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. click Browse. centralized. choose New  ➤ Project. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. In the following illustration. select the folder to save your files to by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. notice the list of library names. Save. click the File Locations tab. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Options. However. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. click Browse. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. 7 In the Options dialog box. or loading a Revit Building file. 8 Click Cancel. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. 3 Under Default template file. and change the name to My Library. On the File menu. under Default path for family template files. TIP To view a template. 2 In the Options dialog box. click . When you are opening. and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. saving. and click OK. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. such as in a large. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box.

21 Under Libraries. and Import dialog boxes. or families. 19 On the Settings menu. 16 On the File menu. and click OK. 25 Click OK. This path is determined during installation. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. If you work in a large office. Modifying System Settings | 117 . 18 Click Cancel. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. click Open. Load. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. 22 Click to delete the library. 20 Click the File Locations tab. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. and select it as the library path. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. If you want to relocate this path. and click OK. click Options. templates. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. click the My Library icon. Save. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. click My Library. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 14 Under Library Name. select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. specify the new location here.

Modifying Snap Settings. click OK.rte in the Metric folder. click Modify. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 24 In the Options dialog box.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. work with snapping turned off. 14 Click in the drawing area. click Edit. click Training Files. and then click File  ➤ Exit. click Edit. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 26 Proceed to the next exercise. You can turn snap settings on and off. 11 In the Options dialog box. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click OK. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. In this exercise. click Exit. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. and click Open. 3 Under Settings. 10 On the File menu. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the text editor. you modify snap settings. click Edit. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 2 In the Options dialog box. click Save. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Options. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Close. 17 Click OK. 18 On the Settings menu. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 4 Under Personal dictionary. scroll down the list of building industry terms. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 20 Under Settings. click the Spelling tab. 7 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Spelling. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click Options. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click OK. 25 On the File menu. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. click Exit. click Text. 6 On the File menu. under Template file. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. If prompted. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. you modify snap increments. click Browse. click Save. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click the Spelling tab. 5 In the New Project dialog box. delete sheetmtl-CU. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 19 In the Options dialog box. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 16 On the Tools menu. click Restore Defaults. do not save the changes. 5 In the text editor. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. 22 In the text editor.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. If you do not have a wheel button. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and enter 500 . Modifying System Settings | 119 . Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. 7 Under Dimension Snaps.6 On the Settings menu. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. zoom out until it does so. While sketching. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. As you zoom in and out within a view. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. This is the increment that you added previously. For example. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. snapping reverts to the system default settings. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. click Wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. If it does not. After you click to place the object at the midpoint.. click OK. 8 Under Object Snaps. and move the cursor to the right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click Snaps. use the wheel button on your mouse.

and object styles. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. 22 On the Settings menu. it will snap to the endpoints. and use it to complete the exercises. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. When you apply a material to a component. and click Wall. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. 18 Enter SM. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. If you move the cursor along the wall. Notice that snapping is once again active. click Close. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and the wall edges. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. You create and modify materials. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. fill patterns. 24 Click OK. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. Do not set the wall end point. and do not save the file. click Snaps. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Using these options. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and delete the value 500 . save the project file with a unique name. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. and move the cursor to the right. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the midpoint. 25 On the File menu. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. lines. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. Finally. and specify the wall endpoint. click Modify. Modifying Project Settings. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. 21 Move the cursor downward. annotations.

When a model component is loaded into a project. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. enter Masonry . and click OK. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor.Stone for Name. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. click Materials. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. In the steps that follow. click Open. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Settings. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . and select Masonry . Masonry-Fieldstone. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 Scroll down. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. you render a region to observe the changes. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project.Fieldstone. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. However. 4 In the New Material dialog box.In the steps that follow. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. 3 Click Duplicate.

click to select a texture. enter 0. expand Views (all). 7 In the Material Library dialog box. and select Stone82.Fieldstone for Name. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 28 In the Type Selector. 25 Click OK three times. enter Masonry . Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. on the Material menu. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 19 Click Duplicate. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 23 On the right side of the Material field. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. expand Floor Plans. and click . click OK.75 for X and Y. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. The AccuRender texture Masonry . 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. 15 Click OK. 11 Under Offset. In the next exercise. 27 Press CTRL. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click Edit. select user from the list of libraries. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. click the Maps tab. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. and click OK. click Edit. 20 Enter the new wall name. click This is the material you created previously.Brick. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit/New. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . . 26 Select the right exterior wall.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. Fieldstone on CMU. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. click the Orientation tab. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 21 In the Value field for Structure. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. and click OK. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. select Masonry . and double-click Level 1. Before closing the Materials dialog box.Fieldstone material.Fieldstone for the name. and click OK. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box. click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1.

and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. right-click the Design Bar. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. click Display Model. click Save As. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. In the following exercise.29 On the View Toolbar. 31 In the drawing area. and click Rendering. When finished. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . Controlling Object Styles.rvt. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. the rendering process begins. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. In the exercise. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Zoom into the model. click Region Raytrace. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the File menu. TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. select Region Raytrace. Notice the roof did not render. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model.

7 Under Custom. click Import. click Custom. and enter . choose Model. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name. such as steel. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. TIP Typically. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. m_Settings-in progress. 10 Under Custom. 5 Click New. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall.pat from the Common folder. Drafting pattern density is fixed. expand Elevations.56 for Import scale. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 12 Click OK. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. click Fill Patterns. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training.rvt. 3 Under Pattern Type. select fldstn. 2 On the Settings menu. and double-click East.

14 On the Options Bar. click . 26 On the View Toolbar. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. click Save. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. adjust your zoom settings as needed. 27 On the File menu. there are often multiple window types within a project. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. 23 Click OK three times. click Edit. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Fieldstone material. TIP If the pattern does not display. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. under Pattern Type. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. select Model. click to select a fill pattern. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. click . notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . click OK. For example. and click OK. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. click . In the Materials dialog box. Controlling Object Styles. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click in the Material field for layer #1. 16 In the Value field for Structure.Fieldstone. 22 In the Materials dialog box. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. 19 Under Surface Pattern.

2 On the keyboard. m_Settings-in progress. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. expand 3D Views.rvt. and double-click 3D Model View.

click By Category. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box.3 On the View Control Bar. click the Trim Exterior value. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click OK. click . click OK. click By Category. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Edit/New. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 On the Options Bar. under Other. . under Other. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. and click Shading with Edges. 11 Zoom out. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . click Modify. click the Trim Exterior Material value. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 Select one of the windows. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 18 On the Design Bar. click . and select the circular window on the second level. . click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar.

27 Under Category. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 21 Under Category. click Save. click 29 On the File menu. expand Windows. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. and click in the Material field.White for Trim material.rvt. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. Notice that the external window frames are now white. click OK. select Trim. 26 On the Settings menu. click Object Styles. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. 22 Under the Windows category.19 On the Settings menu. m_Settings-in progress. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. select Trim . click . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 28 On the View Toolbar. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Windows. specify Trim . 24 In the Materials dialog box. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.Granite for name. click Object Styles. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 23 On the right side of the Material field. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. and click OK. . and click OK twice. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

click Line Patterns. click Model Graphics Style.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 10 Select Red for Line Color. m_Settings-in progress. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. 2 On the Settings menu. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. now you must apply it. 7 On the View Control Bar. 11 Click OK. and click Hidden Line. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. You have created a new line pattern. enter Roof Line for Name.rvt. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . click New. click Object Styles. under Category. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. select Roofs. is open with the 3D view active. 8 On the Settings menu.

Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. and select Black for Line Color. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. double-click Site. 13 On the View Control Bar. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 18 On the View menu. and click OK. under Category. Select Blue for Line Color. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. click New. 24 On the Settings menu. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. under 3D Views. 22 Click OK twice. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. double-click 3D Model View. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. select Roofs. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. Notice the site topography and the property lines. and select Roofs for Visibility. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. click Line Styles. under Modify Subcategories. 17 Click OK. click Object Styles. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 On the Settings menu.

(Make sure you specify a negative value. 36 Click OK. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 38 On the View menu. 42 On the File menu. select Zoning Setback. specify the following: ■ ■ Click .27 For the Zoning Setback category. click . and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 34 On the View menu. Select Red for Line Color. 35 On the Model Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines.) Click . and clear Zoning Setback. Modifying Annotations. double-click Level 1 Annotated. 31 In the Options Bar. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. 41 On the View Toolbar. expand Lines. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. 37 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click . 28 Click OK. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. expand Lines. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . and clear Zoning Setback. 30 In the Type Selector. click Save. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 Click OK. 39 On the Model Categories tab. under Floor Plans. 33 On the View Toolbar.

2 On the Settings menu. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 Click OK twice. click Modify. 5 Under Text.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. is open with the 3D View active. click the default value for Units Format.rvt.rvt. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. scroll down to Windows. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 18 In the Open dialog box. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 15 On the Settings menu. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. 4 Enter the name Linear . 12 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. double-click Level 1 Annotated. click Duplicate. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. under Category. 17 Click Load.Imperial dimension available. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . 14 Click Cancel. In the Type Selector. notice that there is a Linear . click Dimension. 16 In the Tags dialog box. You have created a new dimension style. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. under Floor Plans. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.Number.Imperial and click OK. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. and select M_Window Tag . m_Settings-in progress.

This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. 24 On the Options Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Unless overridden. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . and click OK.Number as the assigned tag. 19 Click Open. . you specify the project units of measurements. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. In the final section.In the preview image.Number. M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. click Save. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. notice Window Tags appears twice.Number. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click Tag All Not Tagged. 21 Under Loaded Tags. the other displays the instance value. select M_Window Tag . Under Category. 32 On the View Toolbar. 26 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. In the second section. click Modify. click M_Window Tag . Leave M_Window Tag . clear Leader. you modify the temporary dimension settings. and Detail Level Options. click Tag. 25 On the left side of the north wall. m_Settings-in progress.Number is now the assigned tag. Temporary Dimensions. click 33 On the File menu. 29 On the east wall. In the first section. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. click the three left-most windows. dimension values display using this setting. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. 20 In the Tags dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. verify that Create is clear. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Number. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. 22 Click OK. Temporary Dimensions. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. you modify the detail level assignments. 28 Under Leader. notice that the label displays 1i.

Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Format dialog box. 13 On the File menu. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click Close. and click OK. click the default value for Format. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Project Browser Organization. and expand 3D Views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. click Save. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. expand Floor Plans.rvt from the Common folder. click Open. select meters squared for Unit suffix. and click OK. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Unless overridden. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click Detail Level. Open c_Project_Browser. under Area. click . 4 In the Project Units dialog box. You do not select a view scale to move it. 12 Click OK. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. select Openings. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. click Temporary Dimensions. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. In this table. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. select Faces. and click OK. 14 On the File menu. dimensions use these project settings. expand Views (all). click Project Units. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. 3 In the Format dialog box. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. 8 Under Walls. In this exercise. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. under Length. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Click OK. click the default value for Format. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. In this project.

and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 2 In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click Apply. 5 On the Views tab. click Browser Organization. 7 On the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. select Discipline. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). In the Project Browser. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 14 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. expand each view type. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. On the Project Browser. 4 On the Settings menu. under Sheets. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 12 Click the Sheets tab.Phase 1-Structure East Wing .Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . 13 Select Sheet Prefix. click Browser Organization. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. click Browser Organization. and click OK. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 8 Select Phase. and click OK.Phase 2-Structure West Wing .

select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and Discipline. click the Folders tab. levels. Creating an Office Template. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. 22 On the File menu. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. under Views. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. and click OK. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. When you create new projects. 16 Click the Views tab. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. click Close. dimensions styles. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. click Browser Organization. expand Complete. and click OK. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . navigate to your preferred directory. 21 In the Project Browser. and expand both Architectural and Structural. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. enter a unique file name. and view names. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. and click New. expand 3D Views. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. In this lesson. View Type (Family and Type). In the lesson that follows. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. you create an office template. and click OK. Proceed to the next lesson. If you want to save this file. and render scenes in a template. You can also save these settings in a template file. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. named print settings.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. You can save Project Browser organization schemes.

12 Under Template File. expand Elevations. When you create the material. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. for instance. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. Creating an Office Template | 137 . you modify the project settings for your new template. 11 Under Create New. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. For example. For example. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. 14 Click Open. select Project for Create new. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. the same rules apply. 13 Select the default template. When you create a new template based on an existing template.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. expand Views. Whenever you create a new project or template.rte template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. If you have additional projects open. 10 On the File menu. In that case. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. drag a zoom region around the level heads. select Project Template. click Close. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. If you want to use a template other than the default. 7 On the View menu. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. when you create a new project. click Browse. and click Open. 2 In the New Project dialog box. structural or construction. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. click Browse. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. click New  ➤ Project. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Project Settings. Other templates. 5 Click OK. and click OK. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. such as the structural template. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. 9 On the File menu. 3 Under Template File. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Other than the default template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. you select the starting point for your office template. click New ➤ Project. you can select it now. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. close them. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. and double-click North. in the drawing area. 6 In the Project Browser.

8 Click OK when finished. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. and move model patterns. and create the AccuRender material. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. or modify existing patterns. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects.In this exercise. click Object Styles. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . rotate. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. click Fill Patterns. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. For more details on modifying these settings. see the previous lesson. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. You can align. 3 Under AccuRender. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. line patterns. Choose the appropriate option. 2 Scroll down the Name list. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. During this exercise. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. Observe the materials that are already defined. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. In the Object Styles dialog box. line colors. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. click Materials. If you create or modify new materials. weights. specific modifications are not dictated. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. you can set line weights. create and modify them as needed. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building.

click Line Weights. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. and scroll through the list of categories. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. and click Edit. 31 To modify a line pattern. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. create new subcategories. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 12 If necessary. select it. 18 If necessary. click Line Styles. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. 17 For existing line categories. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. 19 Click OK. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 28 Click OK. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. In the dialog box. create new line subcategories. click Line Patterns. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 33 Click OK. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. modify the line weight. or line pattern as needed. and create new subcategories as needed. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. Creating an Office Template | 139 . Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. You can add and delete view scales. 14 Modify categories. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. such as section lines and dimension lines. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. one for perspective model line styles. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. and one for annotation symbol line styles. line color.

The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. To see the details of a particular style. Linear. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. 49 To load new annotation tags. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Duplicate. In the Tags dialog box. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. tags. 45 Click OK. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. 54 Click OK. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. when you add a door with the tag option selected. select it from this list. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. On the Settings menu. 57 Click OK. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. angular. For example. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. and dimensions. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. Volume. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. and specify the properties. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. click Load. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. To see the details of a particular style. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. and specify the properties. name the style. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. click Duplicate. 56 Specify the Slope option. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. and click OK. 52 Under Length. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. and radial dimensions are modified separately. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 39 Click OK. click Format. select it from this list. name the style.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. and Angle settings. and choose a decimal symbol. click Project Units. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions.

When you create a new view. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. In a typical project. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. The detail level is based on view scale. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. or Edit existing organization types. 69 Click the Sheets tab. 68 If necessary. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. 63 Review the table. Although these settings can be saved within a template. create new browser organization types. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. or Edit existing organization types. click Detail Level. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. Rename. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 64 Click OK. 70 Delete. 71 If necessary. 67 Delete. create new browser organization types. click the Views tab. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. However. For example.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. To move the view scales. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. Creating an Office Template | 141 . NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 59 Under Walls. or Fine. and move view scales as needed. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click the arrows between columns. TIP In the drawing area. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 72 Click OK. Medium. Using the arrows between the columns. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. click Temporary Dimensions. 60 Under Doors and Windows. 61 Click OK. Rename. In such a case. click Browser Organization. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization.

select Edit/New. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. if you loaded every window type you could find. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. Site Settings If necessary. Depending on the intended use of this template. or add to this selection. titleblocks. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. Although this is possible. you can move onto the next component type. or use the Project Browser. furniture. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or modify a door. create. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. You can load any family or group into a template. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. You can find additional information in Help. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Obviously. phase filters. you may want to delete. Although the options are endless. you do both. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. If necessary. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 2 In the Type Selector. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. select Load. create. In the Element Properties dialog box. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you could load detail components. Select it. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. and click Open.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. For example. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. and make modifications in each area as necessary. click Door. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Use the instructions in the table below to load. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. Use the table below as a checklist. there are some important thoughts to consider. modify. In addition. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you can set up the phases. In the steps that follow. If necessary. If necessary. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. or electrical fixtures. the section cut material. For example. Make modifications. However. This could be useful for things such as hardware. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If this selection is satisfactory. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. Links to associated tutorials are provided. and electrical fixtures. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. See Modifying Views and View Templates. you can set the default contour line interval. If you have not completed the previous exercise. or load a new door type. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. and the poche depth. do so before starting this exercise. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. select from the Options Bar. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. 3 To modify. and click OK. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list.

and click OK. expand Families. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. select Edit/New.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. Click Duplicate. 4 Click OK. 6 On the File menu. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Press ESC twice to return to the template. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. Enter Name. click Load from Library. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Notice that each family category is listed. Modify type properties. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and select the titleblock type. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded.) 9 Expand the titleblock. Creating an Office Template | 143 .

Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu.10 On the Options Bar. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. To load a titleblock. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. and click Delete. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. In addition. . RELATED For more information. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. Discipline. click View Templates. load. 12 Click OK. In this exercise. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. This titleblock is currently part of the template. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Detail Level. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. Modifying Views and View Templates. To do so. At any time. see Creating a Titleblock Family. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. click Load. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. create. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. you can apply a view template to any view. In this exercise. click 11 Click <<Preview. you create the views required for your template. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. View Range. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. you will first modify view templates. In addition. right-click the component. you created new projects using different templates.

under Floor Plans. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. expand Floor Plans. 11 Click Apply. and then click OK. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Apply. 6 Click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. In addition. After applying the template. review the floor plans. under Floor Plans. open the view from the Project Browser. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. under Floor Plans. or delete this view. double-click Site. duplicate. and apply the appropriate template. and click OK. click Apply View Template. select Site Plan. the view is not linked to the template in any way. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. and elevations. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Notice the level names. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. or delete them as needed. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. 12 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 18 If you modified any other view templates. ceiling plans. Black level heads have no associated views. select Make Plan View. duplicate. 24 In the Options Bar. you can rename this view according to your preference. double-click Level 2. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. in the context menu. Creating an Office Template | 145 . Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. click Apply View Template. 16 On the View menu.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Project Browser. Upon the application of the view template. double-click South. under Elevations. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 4 If necessary. notice that you have the option to rename. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. Rename. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 13 On the View menu. If necessary. and click OK. click Apply. 20 In the Project Browser. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. review the existing floor plans. right-click Level 1. click Apply View Template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. and. 23 To add additional levels to the template. 8 On the View menu. expand Views. You can also duplicate or delete the view. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views.

go to the View menu. 30 In the Project Browser. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select the category type. on the View toolbar. click 33 On the View toolbar. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. modify settings as needed. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. On the Formatting tab. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. supply a view name. and select Rename. click Sheet. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. You can add schedules to a template. modify settings as needed. 40 Click OK. select and order required fields. expand 3D Views. and click OK. click 29 In the Project Browser.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. and click View Properties. click Schedule/Quantities. 31 Rename the 3D View. On the Appearance tab. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. to orient and save the view. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. You are prompted to select a titleblock. If necessary. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. modify settings as needed. assign filters. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click . select one. On the Filter tab. and click OK. To do so. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. on the View toolbar. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click . right-click {3D}. You can use this tool. and click OK. 32 To create additional 3D views. and modify their properties accordingly. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. under 3D Views. Dynamically Modify View. 36 To save the view.

Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. Choose from bitmap. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. if one exists. settings. and a Clouds tab appears. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. tiff. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click Render Scene. select the Clouds option. exterior-default. select Exterior. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. 8 Under Scene Settings. 7 Click OK. 5 Specify the background color. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. Creating an Office Template | 147 . After the sheet is created. 2 Under Type. select the titleblock and delete it. select the default titleblock. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. while in winter. jpeg. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. Modifying Render Scene Settings. if not. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. for example. it is completely bare. 45 Create new sheets as needed. and click Rename. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. and colors. and click OK. for example. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and provide a name for the scene. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. go to the View menu. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. place. 10 Under Plant Season. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. You can still add views to the sheet. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. which is included on the Revit Building CD.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. or targa. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. and then click OK. the relevant tab appears. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. click Environment. under Scene Settings. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. click Sun. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. 9 Specify the date and time. Be sure that you have installed this software. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. for example. To do so. 3 Click OK.

Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. Better. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. however. Medium. but provides the highest quality. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Best. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Modifying Import/Export Settings. This works on opaque faces only. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Higher values cause longer rendering times. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Better. This is a very time consuming operation but. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. the quality also is lower. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. When you import a DWG or DXF file. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Medium. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. Good. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Good. Best. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF.Default. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 Proceed to the next exercise. but also increases the solution time. and click OK. This setting is effective for region raytraces. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. click New. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. 17 Click OK when finished. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. for example Interior . Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. Best is the slowest.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye.

detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. 9 Select Save As.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. doors. project parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. 2 For each category. therefore. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. Using Shared Parameters. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. When scheduling. windows. name the file. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. 5 For each category. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. and click Save. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. and so on. When you create a multi-category schedule. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. For example. project parameters. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. Creating Named Print Settings. and related multi-category tags and schedules. In this exercise. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. and click Save. You can save these mappings to a text file. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. They cannot be shared with other projects. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. select Save As. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. select Save As. for example.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. When you import a DWG or DXF file. and they become the set mappings for the project. 8 In the dialog box. Creating an Office Template | 149 . and so on. These settings are retained within the project template. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. name the file.txt for MicroStation). Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and click Save.

5 Enter the group name. 24 Click Select. you can begin creating parameter groups. and click OK. 7 Under Parameter group. and click OK when finished. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . If a file already exists. select the tag. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. click New. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. 3 Name and save the file. 2 Click Create. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 31 Navigate to the directory. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. and choose a shared parameter. 23 To add a shared project parameter. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. 16 Under Name. 9 Name the Parameter. and click Open. For each parameter group. 10 Click OK. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 17 Under Discipline. select a parameter discipline type. and select Shared Parameter. 27 Click OK. you can create a list of parameters. 11 For each parameter group. click Project Parameters. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. enter a parameter name. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 8 Under Parameters. 18 Under Type. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. add required parameters. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 25 Click OK. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. 14 Click Add. 22 Add project parameters as needed. you may want to save the file to a network location. click New. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. under Groups. and specify the Type. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. After the file is named. select a parameter value type. select a group that you want to add parameters to. click Shared Parameters. click Add. select Project parameter. The tag is now part of the template. 21 Click OK. you can load them into the template. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 30 On the File menu. For information on creating multi-category tags. This allows you to name the external parameter file.

click OK.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. paper placement. click Setup. If you need to share this file with others. and make it your default template file. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. By going first to the Print command. Creating an Office Template | 151 . and create additional settings as needed. enter a name for the schedule. For each printer. Save the template 12 On the File menu. and create new settings for this printer. and the percent of actual size. 36 When you have completed the schedule. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 5 In the New dialog box. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and click OK. click Print. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. 14 Under Save as type. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. 15 Name the template. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. select a different printer. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. Creating Named Print Settings. and print. Your template is complete. click Schedule/Quantities. The only remaining task is to save it. 6 Modify the printer settings. you should save it to a network path. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. select Template Files (*. click New. make minor modifications if necessary. you can set options such as sheet sizes. you create named print settings. 2 Under Name. 11 Click OK when finished. click Setup. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. 3 Under Settings.rte). save the file as a template. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. you need only select a setting. Depending on your office environment. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. 4 Click Save As. and click Save. click Save. By creating named settings within the template. 34 Under Name. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. 9 In the Print dialog box.

and navigate to the location where you saved the template. 17 Select Browse. and click Open. If you have a project. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. go to the File menu. 23 Navigate to the template location. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 22 Next to Default template file. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. and click New  ➤ Project. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .Use the template 16 To use the template. You can also set this template as your default template. By investing the time to individualize your template. In this lesson. click Browse. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. you modified settings. This can provide a good starting point for a template. 24 Click OK. and saved them to a template. In addition. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. select it. click Options. and click Open. loaded components. In addition. 18 Select the template. 19 Click OK.

You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. 153 . You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. For more information. and how to create a compound ceiling. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. see the online Help.

you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. After you add ceilings to the model. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. click Ceiling. expand Views (all). you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . The ceiling is displayed. when the room boundary highlights.rvt located in the Common folder. 3 In the Type Selector. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. click Open. You add four different types of ceilings. expand Ceiling Plans. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. select it. Open c_Ceiling. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model.

6 In the Type Selector. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. under Name. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. select it.5 Select the lower center room and. 15 In the Materials dialog box. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. click Edit/New. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify.Interior . 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. when the room boundary highlights. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. 10 On the Options Bar. click OK. click . click Duplicate. it displays in the Type Selector. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. Creating Ceilings | 155 . 13 In the Name dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. click OK. select Finishes . and then click . When selected. and click OK. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid.

NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you change the project to Metric. You create a new ceiling type. on the File menu. expand Ceiling Plans. and double-click First Floor. click the Training Files icon.18 If you want to save your changes. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. In the steps that follow. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and then add the ceiling to the building model. click Open. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . click Save As. add layers of material to the ceiling type. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). you learn how to create a compound ceiling.rvt located in the Common folder. The original project units are imperial. Open c_Condominium.

Gypsum Wall Board. enter Gypsum board on metal furring.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Material. click . 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. click Preview to display the current layers. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. under Material. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. and click OK. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. 7 In the Type Selector. click OK. click Project Units. under Thickness. under Material.Interior . select Metal . click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. under Layers. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Finishes . under Thickness. under Construction. 8 On the Options Bar. click OK. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. click Edit/New. Creating Ceilings | 157 . select Metal .Furring. under Thickness. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. click Insert twice to add two new layers. specify Millimeters for units. 11 In the Name dialog box. 4 In the Format dialog box. click Duplicate. click OK. click Ceiling. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click the format button for length. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.Cold Rolled Channel.

on the File menu. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . and double-click Section 1. click the Detail Level control.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Sections (Type 1). Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 21 On the View Control Bar. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. and click Fine. 23 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. click Save As.

or ceilings using the Opening command. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. In addition. In the exercises that follow. floors. When creating a hosted opening. roof. 159 . you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. or ceiling. or ceiling. floor.

click Open. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. click the Training Files icon. In this case. notice the existing dormer.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. the project must have an existing dormer. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut.

WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. click Opening. and double-click Roof . and. 3 In the Project Browser. The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. and click Modelling. right-click the Design Bar. and double-click Attic View. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer.Dormer. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. click to select it. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. when the edges of the roof highlight.2 In the Project Browser. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . expand Views (all). under Views (all). select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. This is an interior 3D view. expand 3D Views. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. and click OK. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Select the main roof to be cut. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

select it. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. a bottom face of a floor. 8 Zoom in around the dormer. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. a side face of a wall. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . an edge of the roof to be cut. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. when it highlights. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. and.Next.

Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. 12 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the lower sketch line. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. click Modify. double-click Attic View. click Finish Boundary.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. under 3D Views. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. 9 On the Design Bar. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. 14 In the Project Browser. and notice the drag controls on each end.

Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. select Save As from the File menu. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face.15 On the File menu. 2 Using the spin function. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . NOTE If you want to save this file. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Close. click . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. select it. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click Modify. floor. and click OK. when it highlights. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. In the following illustration. and. select Pick a face of a roof.3 On the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . and click Modelling. click . 7 On the Options Bar. right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. The opening on the right is cut vertically.

select it. when it highlights.9 On the Design Bar. and. click Finish Sketch. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.

The opening is an element independent of the roof. You can move it. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and constrain it like any other element. change the shape. . Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. notice the tool displays. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. click Open. click . Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. 2 Using the spin function. click Close.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click Finish Sketch. click 12 On the File menu. NOTE If you want to save this file. dimension it. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Save As from the File menu. 11 On the Options Bar.

when it highlights. and. 6 Click OK. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Pick a roof. and click Modelling. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . select it. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. In the following illustration.3 On the Design Bar. floor. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.

12 On the Design Bar. click . 8 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and. click Lines. and double-click Roof . 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 13 On the View Toolbar. expand Floor Plans. 10 On the Options Bar. when it highlights.Dormer. select it.Because the cut is vertical. click . it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.

. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. notice the tool.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. select Save As from the File menu. click 16 On the File menu. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. and click Finish Sketch. click the Training Files icon. You can move it. NOTE If you want to save this file. dimension it. In this exercise. expand Views (all). and constrain it like any other element. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. change the shape. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. and double-click Section 1. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson.rvt located in the Metric folder. 15 On the Options Bar. click Close. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.

Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. However. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. click Opening. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 .Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. click Ref Plane. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Before cutting the floor opening. and click OK. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and the level 1 and 2 lines. select Pick a roof. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. floor. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. and click Modelling. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. The first click specifies the start point. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. In the following illustration. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. or ceiling and cut vertically. right-click the Design Bar.

10 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1.6 Select the floor on Level 2. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . and click Wireframe. 8 On the View Control bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. select Floor Plan: Level 2. You are prompted to select a view. Notice the new floor opening. and the reference plane you added previously. 9 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. you may close the project with or without saving it. under Views (all). If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Sections (Filled Arrow). Otherwise. click . do so now. click Finish Sketch. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. 13 On the Design Bar. and click Open View. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. click Model Graphics Style. the stairs.

under Sections (Filled Arrow). right-click the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. and click Open View. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Modelling. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. 8 In the Project Browser. Notice the new ceiling opening. the interior face of the wall. click . 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. under 3D Views. floor. under Views (all). Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . 4 In the Go To View dialog box. select Pick a roof. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click OK. click Opening. Use the following illustration as a guide. under Views (all). 7 On the Design Bar. Cut a ceiling opening. or ceiling and cut vertically. 5 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1 Interior View. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1.

and the level 1 and 2 lines. expand Views (all). The length of the plane does not have to be precise. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. click Open. and double-click Section 1. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. NOTE If you want to save this file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. However. you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. click the Training Files icon. select Save As from the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Close. you must sketch in a plan view. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom.10 On the File menu. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process.rvt located in the Metric folder. Before cutting the opening. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. however. The first click specifies the start point. click Ref Plane. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise.

click . the stairs. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. select Create shaft opening. and the reference plane you added previously. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. click Properties. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. and click Modelling. click Lines. 7 On the View Control bar. 14 Click OK. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. 16 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. under Views (all). 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. click Model Graphics Style. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. and click Wireframe. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . click Finish Sketch. right-click the Design Bar. click Opening. select Floor Plan: Level 2. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. double-click Section 1. under Constraints. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint.4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. under Sections (Filled Arrow). and click Open View. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click OK. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. 9 On the Options Bar.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings .Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. you can cut a single opening through every floor. Using the shaft tool. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. ceiling.

and panels.Railings 6 In this tutorial. balusters. 177 . posts. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails.

select M_Baluster .Square w Ball. press the CTRL key. between the balusters. you create a railing and add components to it. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. and click OK. such as panels. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. M_Post . and click Open. 3 On the File menu. 6 On the Design Bar.rfa. click New ➤ Project. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rfa. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings .rfa. click Lines. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. 2 In the New Project dialog box. M_Baluster Panel 1. click Railing.Custom4. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. Project is selected under Create new. 4 In the Open dialog box. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 7 On the Options Bar.Custom3. select Chain.rfa. Before you lay out the railing. and M_Post . M_Baluster . verify that DefaultMetric.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise.Newel.rfa . The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters.Creating Railings In this lesson.

In row 2. and click OK. click Edit for Rail Structure. click Insert. enter 300 mm for Height. and then click . 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate.Dark Gray. and click OK. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. In row 2. click Edit/New.Paint Finish . Matte for Name.Paint Finish . In row 2. select Metal . 13 In the Name dialog box. click Railing Properties.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. select Metal . 19 In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. Creating Railings | 179 . 16 In row 1. Matte for Name. click in the Material field. enter Bottom for Name. In row 2. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. enter Top for Name. in row 2. . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. and click OK. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1.Dark Gray. enter -25 mm for Offset. click in the Material field. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.

24 In row 3. 31 On the Design Bar. 25 In row 4. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. click on row 2. from previous. click Edit for Baluster Placement.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. under Posts.Glass for Baluster Family. from previous. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. select M_Post. Adjusting Railing Parameters. under Construction. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. select M_Post . 32 On the Toolbar. A new row is displayed. 29 In row 3. 34 On the File menu. click . Enter 380 mm for Dist. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . 23 In row 2. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . Select Bottom for Base.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Shading with Edges.rvt. select M_Post. Select Bottom for Base. Enter 380 mm for Dist.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click OK. 28 In row 2.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. enter 230 mm for Dist. under Main pattern. from previous. and then click Duplicate. click Finish Sketch. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. 33 On the View menu. in row 1. 30 Click OK three times. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs.

under Construction. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. click . select Center for Justify. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the railing. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Construction. under Main pattern. 18 Click OK three times. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. under Main pattern.rvt. select End for Justify. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. and double-click East. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. under Main pattern. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 8 Click OK three times. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click . expand Elevations. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. Training_Railing. expand Views (all). under Construction. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 Click OK three times. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating Railings | 181 .

25 In the Element Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster . The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. 33 Under Posts. 34 Click OK three times. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Construction. 23 Click OK three times. 35 On the Toolbar. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click .Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. click Edit/New. click . click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. click Edit for Baluster Placement. and spacing options. under Main pattern. select Beginning for Justify. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. click .The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. click Edit/New. 28 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. under Main pattern. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. custom baluster excess length fill. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. enter 54 degrees for Angle. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.

Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. from previous. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. from previous. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Creating Railings | 183 . a corner post does not occur. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. In row 4. 44 On the File menu. click . under Main pattern. double-click East.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. enter 0 mm for Dist. 42 Click OK three times. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. enter 380 mm for Dist. 43 In the Project Browser. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. click Modify and select the railing. 37 On the Options Bar.rvt. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit/New. under Elevations. 41 Under Posts.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

Roofs 7 In this tutorial. In addition. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. 185 .

a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. select Name. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. 4 Click OK. gable. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. including hip. and mansard roofs. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Views (all). and click OK. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building.rvt located in the Metric folder. You do not need to create the work plane.Creating Roofs In this lesson. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. and double-click Level 1. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. shed. Open m_Roofs. you learn to create several different types of roofs. click the Training Files icon. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

Creating Roofs | 187 . 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof.

sketch the roof profile.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. select Chain. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

click Modify. click . expand Sections (Type 1). 18 Select the edge of the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click to display the model. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. Creating Roofs | 189 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior face of the wall.16 On the View toolbar. click . expand Views (all). Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and select the second wall. press CTRL. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Next. press TAB. The roof should resemble the following illustration.

To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs .24 On the Options Bar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. click Attach for Top/Base. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends.

and click Open View. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. clear Defines slope. verify that Defines slope is selected. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. 10 Press CTRL. 7 On the Options Bar. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. Next. click Pick Walls. and click OK. Creating Roofs | 191 . click Finish Roof. 3 Next. sketch the roof footprint. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. under Dimensions. and on the Options Bar. By default. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. click Modify. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 4 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. m_Roofs. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select both slope definition lines.rvt. and enter 600 for Overhang. click .

192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and double-click Level 3. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. m_Roofs. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint.14 On the View toolbar. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. clear Defines slope. When you complete the roof. press TAB. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. and enter 600 for Overhang.

13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. sketch the chimney opening.6 Click to select all the walls. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 15 On the Options bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. add new slope lines to the roof. select Defines Slope. Creating Roofs | 193 . 8 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Next. Next. select Defines Slope. click . click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Finish Roof. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.18 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Floor Plans. click to view the new roof in the model. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. click Pick Walls. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Views (all). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. select Defines slope. m_Roofs. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 11 To trim the first line segment. 10 On the Options Bar. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Creating Roofs | 195 . clear Defines Slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. close the roof sketch. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Lines. click . using the following illustration for guidance. and click . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. Next.

Next. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 18 On the Design Bar. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Modify. click 17 Click to display the model. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof.Next. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and click OK. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. click Finish Roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click Roof Properties. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 14 Under Constraints. 16 On the View toolbar.

3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. Creating Roofs | 197 . m_Roofs. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. and enter 300 for Overhang.23 On the Tools toolbar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. clear Defines Slope. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.rvt. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click . you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint.

and press ENTER. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. click Roof Properties. and click OK. Next. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click .5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 16 Under Constraints. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 10 To trim the first line segment. click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. enter 0 for Overhang. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . press TAB. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. select the left vertical roof line. select Defines slope. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add a slope-defining line. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 9 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

5 On the View menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. Before you can add slope arrows. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. 7 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. you need to add two reference planes. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Offset. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. expand Views (all). click Split Walls and Lines. click . and double-click 3D. To help locate the position of each split. and double-click Level 2. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Roofs | 199 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. 9 On the Tools menu. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model.

NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and click 19 Under Constraints. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. . 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.Next. verify is selected. Aligning Roof Eaves. 18 Press CTRL. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . select Slope for Specify. clear Defines Slope. Next. 11 On the Design Bar. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select both slope arrows. click Slope Arrow. 14 On the Options Bar. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs . The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. and then click OK.15 to add the second slope arrow. 20 Under Dimensions. add two new slope arrows. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 500 for Rise/1000. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Begin the tail at the right reference plane.

expand Views (all). select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Next. 3 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. click . click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. When aligning eaves. click Finish Roof. on the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 201 . m_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. select a method to align the eaves. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 5 On the Options Bar.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and double-click Garage Roof. click Align Eaves. and click OK. The eave lines display with a dimension. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. When eave heights differ. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. the adjacent eave heights must align. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. under Dimensions. 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar.

15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 3 Select the roof and. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and double-click North.14 If you want to save your changes.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Save As. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. expand Elevations. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Open m_Mansard_Roof. expand Views (all). Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating a Mansard Roof. click . under Constraints. on the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. click the Training Files icon. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. on the File menu. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3.

and double-click Level 3. click Lines. 17 On the View toolbar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. under Dimensions. Next. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Roofs | 203 . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. and select the remaining three lines. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Finish Roof.6 On the View toolbar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. 10 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 14 On the Options Bar. press TAB. and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then select Defines slope. click . 7 In the Project Browser. click . click to display the model. click Modify.

rvt located in the Common folder. 1 On the File menu. and click OK.rfa. and click OK twice. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 3 Press CTRL. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Gutters. 8 In the Name dialog box. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click the Training Files icon. open the Profiles folder. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. enter Built-up Fascia. on the File menu. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. you learn how to create roof fascia. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . open the Metric Library folder. and soffits. and soffits in Revit Building. 2 In the Open dialog box. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click Open. gutters. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. Open c_Condominium. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. gutters. click Open. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. After you create a roof. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Duplicate. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. you can easily create its fascia. and Soffits In this lesson.18 If you want to save your changes. and open the Roofs folder. Creating Fascia. click .

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. and Soffits | 205 .11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Gutters. Creating Gutters.

1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Soffits In this exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. click . click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 3 In the Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. and click OK three times. Creating Soffits. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you learn how to place a roof soffit. click in the Value field for Material. and click OK. and then click . click Edit/New. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 10 Click to place the gutter. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 8 In the Materials dialog box. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. c_Condominium. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under Construction. 2 On the Options Bar. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Pick Roofs. c_Condominium. Gutters. expand Views.rvt. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. and Soffits | 207 . expand Floor Plans. 6 In the Project Browser. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). Creating Fascia. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D.

8 Select the roof. click Join Geometry. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.7 On the Tools menu. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and then select the soffit to join them. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 9 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu.

you learn how to create and modify straight. and semi-circular runs of stairs. add railings to your landings.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. You learn to create special feature stairs. 209 . and work with a stair calculator. u-shaped.

2 On the View menu. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Level 2 for Underlay. add. risers and stringers. specify the start point for the stair run. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. expand Floor Plans. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click View Properties. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. click Open. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. and then modify. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. expand Views (all).Creating Stairs In this lesson. click Stairs. You learn to work with different stair components. and double-click Level 1. such as treads. under Graphics. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. railings from another project. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 211 .8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown.

Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. 11 On the Toolbar. click .

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

under Treads. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 Under Dimensions. and then click Edit/New. is at 864. select for Tread Material Value. and click OK. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. Dark Gray Matte for Name. select for Stringer Material Value. and click OK.Paint Finish. click Duplicate. click Stairs. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. 13 In the Materials dialog box. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. and click OK. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box.The new reference plane. 10 In the Name dialog box. enter 915 mm for Width. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. and then click Stairs Properties. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . Dark Gray Matte for Name. select Metal . measured from the exterior wall centerline. 17 In the Materials dialog box. enter Exit Stairs for Name. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. select for Riser Material Value. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. 18 Click OK three times.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. select Finishes . 15 In the Materials dialog box.Paint Finish. select Metal .

The exit stair run layout is complete. Creating Stairs | 233 . 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown.21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown.

and double-click Exit Stairs. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. expand 3D Views. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. click Finish Sketch. and the exit door. expand Views (all).23 On the Design Bar.

and select both railings. 35 Click OK three times. click Modify.27 On the View Control Bar. select M_Baluster . select Railing : 900mm Pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. under Construction. in row 2. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. and the exit stairs are visible. Creating Stairs | 235 . under Posts. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. hold down CTRL. click . The selected objects are hidden.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. click Edit/New.

Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. and click OK. click . Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . and select the exit stairs. 40 On the File menu. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. click Save. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. under Constraints. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. click Modify. 37 On the Options Bar.

enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. and click OK. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. Under Stringers. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. 15 On the Options Bar. select Concrete . select Monolithic Stairs. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Under Treads. and then click Stairs Properties. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. expand Views (all). enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. 11 In the Materials dialog box. click Run. and double-click Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Stairs. Training_Stairs.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Stringers. click OK. and click Edit/New. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Risers. Under Risers. Creating Stairs | 237 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Risers. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. select for Monolithic Material Value. Under Treads. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. enter 1300 mm for Width. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. for Tread Material Value. click Duplicate. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Construction. and click OK. click .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. select Concrete . 6 In the name dialog box.

as shown.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. and click to specify the arc end point. 18 On the keyboard. and press ENTER. enter 1310 for Radius as shown. The semi-circular stair run is complete.

20 On the Design Bar. and double-click Exterior Stairs. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). Creating Stairs | 239 . Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

and click Up. and select Finish 1 [4]. ■ 14 In row 3. Click in the Material field. and in the Materials dialog box. 11 Select row 2. . 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and in the Materials dialog box. under Name. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Name.Interior . click . Enter 15 mm for Thickness. 13 In row 1. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for Structure. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 12 Select row 3. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select Structure [1]. under Layers.EIFS . Click OK. and in the Materials dialog box.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. select Finishes . click Click OK. Click in the Material field. ■ 15 In row 5. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Click in the Material field. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . and click Down twice.5 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Insert twice.Exterior . click . and select Finish 2 [5].Stud Layer. under Name. Enter 50 mm for Thickness. click Duplicate. select Finishes . 8 In the Name dialog box.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). select Wood . click Edit/New.

expand Walls. 22 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Design Bar. 21 Select Generic . 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. and click Select All Instances. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. 25 On the Options Bar. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls .200mm. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. and expand Basic Wall. 17 Click OK three times.16 Click Preview. right-click. click Dimension. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. expand Families.

27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point. Creating Walls | 261 . select Wall faces for Prefer.

34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point.31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. select Faces of core for Prefer. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays.

36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. Creating Walls | 263 .

and double-click Callout of Section 3. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . 50 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1).Interior .GRG . 45 In the Materials dialog box.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. 47 In the Materials dialog box. select Finishes . expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 43 Click OK twice. Enter Gypsum for Name. navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. and click OK. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . click Fill Patterns. 38 On the Settings menu.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. and click Open.Dense for Import.pat. click Materials. click for Pattern. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Gypsum. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. and click Import. and under Cut Pattern. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section.25 for Import scale. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Custom. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. click OK. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. select revit. click New. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. Enter 0. 41 In the Import dialog box.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the south wall. and double-click South. expand Views (all). expand Elevations. and select Top for Attach Wall. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. click Attach for Top/Base.

10 On the Options Bar. and select Top for Attach Wall. under Elevations. double-click North. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. click Attach for Top/Base. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. Creating Walls | 285 . 9 Select the north wall.8 In the Project Browser.

expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. This also completes the Walls lesson. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls .12 In the Project Browser. This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise.

Like walls. you select the grid. you need to select a panel. For example. and you can change these elements individually. Unlike windows.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. To switch panel types. This affects the entire curtain system. panel. you need to change the length of the wall. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. To change grids. or you can use a specific curtain system command. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and mullions. to resize the system. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Like windows. 287 . they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. grid lines. and they are not windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior.

click Open. and double-click Ground Floor. click the Training Files icon. 4 On the Type Selector. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. you create a curtain system using the wall command. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .rvt file located in the Metric folder.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. expand Views (all). click Wall. expand Floor Plans.

Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. 7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. and room bounding. and double-click Southeast Isometric. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . top constraint. click Orient ➤ Northeast. expand Views (all). 11 Select the curtain system and click . and click OK. 9 On the View menu. 12 Under Constraints.8 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. top and base attachments.

and resize the crop boundary as shown. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. 18 In the Project Browser.a. click Elevation. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. and click Rename. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . the curtain system is a single glazed panel. Flat Curtain System | 291 .Right now. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. using curtain grids. under Floor Plans. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.

TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. click Modify. and click OK. 28 On the Edit menu. 27 On the Edit menu. Click to create a vertical grid. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. THIRD FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. FOURTH FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. click Copy to Clipboard. Click to place another grid line. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. FIFTH FLOOR. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. SIXTH FLOOR. 33 On the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Curtain Grid. one larger than the other. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. You do not use the Door command. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. 38 Using the same method. The two segments are removed.Next. click Add or Remove Segments. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. Flat Curtain System | 293 . The segment line style changes to dashed. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. you add a doorway to the curtain system. Instead. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and on the Options Bar. and then select the segment above it.

You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 40 On the Options Bar. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor.39 On the Design Bar. Use the following picture as a guide. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. select One Segment. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 43 Delete the dimensions. and lock them. 42 Place dimensions as shown. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. click Curtain Grid.

To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. under Floor Plans. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 49 On the File menu.rfa. 52 On the Type Selector. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. 50 In the Doors folder. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 55 In the Project Browser. 57 On the View Control Bar. They are part of the curtain panel category. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. under Elevations. Next. The panel changes to a double door. click Modify. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. double-click Entrance Elevation. on the new curtain system you added. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. click . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Now. These panels schedule as doors. This changes the graphics style of the view. 56 In the Project Browser. Next. Flat Curtain System | 295 .TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. and click Wireframe. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. and click Open. not as curtain panels. click in any white space to exit the editor. 54 On the Design Bar.

The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. and the solid panels display in white. 66 On the View Control Bar. click . 61 With the panel still selected. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. 68 On the File menu. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Save As. click System Panel : Solid. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise.rvt. 60 On the Type Selector. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. select Grid Line Segment. click Mullion. 2 On the Options Bar. select All Empty Segments. You are going to change some mullion joins. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Flat Curtain System | 297 . Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 9 Delete the mullions below them. 4 On the Options Bar. so you remove them next. 6 On the Options Bar. there are a few that you do not want. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. however. select Entire Grid Line. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

Two mullion join controls display. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 13 Click the top mullion control.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Modify. 4 On the Type Selector. 15 In the Project Browser.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Finally. 16 Save the file. click . under Floor Plans. click Wall. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. Finally. Curved Curtain System | 299 . You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. 14 On the Design Bar. 5 Click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you add a curtain system using the wall command. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. double-click Southeast Isometric. double-click Ground Floor. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. 6 Under Constraints. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. and click OK. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. 8 On the Options Bar. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed.

12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. eighths. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. You are going to use one of these snaps points. and then sixteenths. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. click Curtain Grid. 15 In the Project Browser. double-click East. Divide the halves into quarters. you place grids on the system. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. under Elevations. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.

select the bottom layer of panels.300mm. Curved Curtain System | 301 . Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file. you change some panels in the system. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise.17 On the Design Bar. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. click Basic Wall: Generic . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next. click Modify. 19 On the Type Selector. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.

specify Glass for Subcategory. click Model Lines.rft. 10 Under Identity Data. 6 On the Options Bar. 1 On the File menu. 8 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. 11 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. and click . 9 Select the extrusion. click Lines. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. enter 100 for Depth. click New ➤ Family. 3 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. 2 In the Metric templates folder. and on the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. click .

All fifth floor panels are selected. under Floor Plans. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. click System Panel . under Floor Plans. Curved Curtain System | 303 . double-click FOURTH FLOOR. and click Flip Orientation. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. click Save As. 22 Right-click. select Curtain Panel . 18 In the Project Browser. All the panels change to the solid panel. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building.Pattern. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 26 On the Type Selector. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. click Modify.Pattern. and return to your project file. 23 On the View toolbar. .rfa family.13 On the Design Bar. All the panels change to the custom panel you created.rfa. and then click . 24 In the Project Browser.Pattern.Solid. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. All fourth floor panels are selected. 20 On the Type Selector. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . 16 On the File menu. and save the family as Curtain Panel . click curved curtain system. 14 On the File menu.

rft. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 8 for Sides. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. click Lines. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. 9 On the Options Bar. For vertical mullions. double-click Metric Profile. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click New ➤ Family. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. 6 On the Settings menu. 27 Save the file. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. under Elevations. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. click Family Category and Parameters. click Mullion. double-click East. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 8 On the Design Bar.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click .

clear Fine. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click Visibility. Click again to specify the ending point. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . 18 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box.detail. click the Training Files icon. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click Modify.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. and click OK. click Detail Component. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 15 On the File menu.

right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. and click OK. under 3D Views. click Duplicate. click Modify. 26 On the File menu. clear Coarse and Medium. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Modify to exit placing mullions.rfa. it can be added as a mullion type. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. select All Empty Segments. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. double-click GROUND FLOOR. and click OK. select Circular Mullion for Family. After the new profile is loaded. 21 Select the detail component. 23 On the File menu. 38 On the Options Bar. 37 Click OK twice. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.20 On the Design Bar. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Save As. and click DELETE. 41 In the Project Browser. so next you remove the unwanted ones. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. You have placed more mullions than you want. 36 Under Construction. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. under Floor Plans. click Mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. 31 Click . 30 On the Modelling tab. 29 Click . 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 40 On the Design Bar.rfa family. 28 In the Project Browser. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Visibility. and return to the project file. 33 Click Edit/New.

4 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. TIP To chain select all the walls. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. and press TAB. In this lesson. and you can click to select them all. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and then apply those custom elements to the system. select Defines slope. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 .43 Save the file. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. All the inside faces highlight. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. you learned to create a curved curtain system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and a ruled curtain system. a storefront system. make custom curtain panels and mullions. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. click Pick Walls.

12 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 10 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.7 On the Design Bar. select Entire Grid Line. click Modify. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 15 On the Options Bar. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 9 Under Constraints. 17 On the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. 19 Save the file. Storefront System In this exercise. click Finish Roof. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. and click OK. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. click Roof Properties. click Mullion.

click Wall. under Floor Plans. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Type Selector. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . select Unconnected for Height. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 5 On the Options Bar. and enter 2400. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. This curtain wall cuts the original wall.

and press ENTER. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 9 On the Design Bar. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. enter 10200 mm. center. Click OK. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing.8 Click the temporary dimension. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). you find Number (Grid 1). This specifies an exact length for the wall. see the Revit Building help. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. Angle (Grid 1). and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. even if the wall height changes. Under the Pattern heading. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. and click . 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. under 3D Views. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. which is specified in the type. or end. To see how the grid layout is defined. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. click Modify. 12 Select the storefront wall. and Offset (Grid 1). 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. For this wall. double-click Southeast Isometric. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. Justification (Grid 1). This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box.

click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. double-click Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. click Mullion. 3 On the View Control Bar. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 Select a curtain grid. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 18 Save the file. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In this exercise. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.

Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. 6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the thin line. 8 Select the highlighted line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . A panel between the 2 lines is created.

click System Panel : Solid. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and define a ruled curtain system. and then eighths. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. and click . you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. 9 Select the panel. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. 15 On the Type Selector. Finally. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and then eighths. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. quarters. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. click Curtain Grid. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 17 Save the file. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . Next. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

Sheets are defined by borders. elevation. begin by first creating sheets. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. and schedules.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. usually contain a title block. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. three-dimensional views. section. which are a type of view in a project. 315 . you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. and are accessible from the Project Browser. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. adjust the view scale. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. how to add views to the sheets. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. click Open. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. how to create new views from a building model. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. Next.

furniture. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. and expand Floor Plans. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . lighting fixtures. and click OK. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. right-click Level 1. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and click Duplicate. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. Turn off visibility for casework. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. enter Level 1 Furniture. 5 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Model Categories tab. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. Casework. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. 9 Under Visibility. expand Views (all).Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. furniture. Casework. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 2 Under Floor Plans. click Project Information. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. click Edit for Project Address. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Rename. furniture.

click Sheet. Enter Residence for Project Name. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .13 In the Edit Text dialog box. Enter J. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. right-click. and click OK. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. and click View. Smith for Client Name. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 16 Click OK. select A0 metric. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. MA 12345 14 Click OK.

click . The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. View scale is a property of the view. click Modify. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. click Add View. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. and click Add View to Sheet.Unnamed. under Identity Data. 21 When the title block highlights. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. and click OK. 19 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 1. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . and select the title block. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. on the Options Bar. expand Sheets (all). 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . 25 In the Views dialog box. 20 On the Design Bar. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar.NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.

click Deactivate View. select 1:20 for View Scale. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Viewport : Title w Line. under Graphics. 32 Select the viewport. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. indicating the view is deactivated. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. and click OK. right-click. and click View Properties. The border and title block are grayed out. and click View Properties. 28 Right-click the view. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. on the View menu. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. click Activate View. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out.27 With the view selected.

This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 36 On the Options Bar. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. and select Wall faces for Prefer. and click to place the dimension.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. as shown in the following illustration. and click Activate View. click . and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. click Modify. click Dimension. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall.

the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . however. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. right-click. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. are specific to the view in which they are created.41 Select the view. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. and the door is updated. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. Dimensions. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Adding a Sheet to the Project. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. double-click Level 1. and click Deactivate View. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated.

rvt. 3 Select the title block. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click . under Sheets (all). is displayed. the new sheet. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. The sheet is incrementally named A102. under Identity Data. Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. A102 . and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. add the furniture plan view.Furniture Plan Level 1. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . m_Drawing_Exercise.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. select A0 metric. click Sheet. you add a new sheet to the project. In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.

right-click on the view on sheet A102. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. 3 On the Design Bar. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Project Browser. and select 1:20. under Floor Plans. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 4 In the Type Selector. m_Drawing_Exercise. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. click the scale value. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Modify. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. double-click A102 . 8 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).Furniture Plan Level 1. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and click to place the view. under Floor Plans. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type.rvt.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Activate View.

The desk. furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. enter 5200 mm. 7 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. 10 On the Window menu. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. The changes made to the lamp. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. click Modify. chair.6 Select one of the furniture components. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets.

Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Callout. callout. double-click Level 1 Furniture. m_Drawing_Exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. click Modify. and select the dashed callout view border. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. you learn how to create new elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room.

Unnamed. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. position the view. click Sheet. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . and select 1:20. The new sheet. and click to place the view. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet.6 On the Design Bar. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. Change the callout view scale. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. 11 In the Views dialog box. select A0 Metric. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. A103 . click Modify. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click OK. click the scale value. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Elevation. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. 18 On the Design Bar. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. double-click Level 1 Furniture. select the elevation symbol arrow. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. Create a new elevation view. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. and click to place the elevation symbol. As you move the cursor. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. center it in the room so that it points north.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall.

20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration.a and Elevation 1 . 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 In the Views dialog box. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). double-click A103 . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 .19 Select the body of the elevation symbol.Unnamed. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all).a.c. expand Elevations.

double-click A102 . under Sheets (all). Create a section view. and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 27 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room.Furniture Plan Level 1.c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet.26 Add Elevation 1 . 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building.

■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50 for Scale. click Section. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. 32 In the Options Bar. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag).

38 Right-click on the viewport. and save the exercise file with a unique name. such as callouts. The drawing sheet is now complete. and click OK. and click Activate View. click Custom for View Scale. click Save As. click Add View. modify the building model from your sheets. and sections.Unnamed. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). 39 Right-click on the view. 42 Right-click on the view. select Section: Section 1. under Graphics. add views to your sheets. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. and click Deactivate View. 45 Close the exercise file. and click Add View to Sheet. on the File menu. 37 In the Views dialog box. and click View Properties. elevations. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. and to create new views of your building model. double-click A103 . 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 44 If you want to save your changes.

click Symbol. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. On construction documents. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 2 In the Project Browser. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. enter Symbol Legend for Name.Filled Level Head . click Open. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. expand Legends. Finally. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. and door frames. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head .rvt located in the Metric folder. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. doors. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. door frame schedule. On construction documents. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. and so on). and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. and click Rename. and click OK.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . click New ➤ Legend.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. Open m_Legends. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

click Text. On the Design Bar. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. click . select Text : 6mm. enter 3mm for Name. click Symbol Legend. click Modify to end the command. 17 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. expand Sheets (all). You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. 15 Working from the top down. 12 Under Text. click Duplicate. you create a text type with the necessary size. and click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Selector. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 9 On the Options bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 3mm for Text Size. and click OK twice. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and double-click A100 . 13 In the Type Selector. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser.

You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. 19 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. click Legend Component.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. name the file m_Legends_in progress. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. Creating a Wall Type Legend.rvt. and click Save. click Save As. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. and click OK. Using Legends | 335 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Select Section for View. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Legend. 3 Right-click Legend 1. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. and click Rename. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. expand Legends.rvt.Brick on CMU for Family. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Legends_in progress.

13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 12 On the Options bar. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Text. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 11 In the Type Selector. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. The text note with leader is added to the legend.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. click to add a single-segment leader.

26 In the Project Browser. 28 On the Design Bar. Using a Legend View to Match Types. click Detail Lines. and click to place it above the symbol legend. Using Legends | 337 . select Text : 6mm. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. and enter Wall Type 1. drag it onto the sheet. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. click Wall Type Legend. click Modify to end the command.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. click Save. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. double-click A100 . You capture the wall type properties in the tool. 23 In the Type Selector. click to add text without a leader. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 22 On the Design Bar. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 29 On the File menu. 27 In the Project Browser. select Medium Lines. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 19 On the Options Bar.

8 On the View Control Bar. click . 2 On the Window menu. select Medium for Detail Level. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. The open drawings are both visible. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. select the wall type 1 component. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. 5 In the floor plan view. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. click Tile.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.rvt. m_Legends_in_progress.

These changes can be due to owner requests. and enter a date. For example. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. In this exercise. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. When you use this option. 9 On the File menu. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. You can create a sequence of revisions. 2 In the Revisions dialog box.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. if the active revision is number 1. click Close. Using Revision Tracking. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. 4 Click on the value for Description. In general. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. contractor inquiries. yet as concise as possible. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review.rvt located in the Metric folder. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. When Issued is selected. If you select By Sheet. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the revision is locked and issued to the field. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. click Revisions. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. click Open. Using the table. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. Open m_Revisions. click the Training Files icon.

which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.rvt. you make changes to the project floor plan. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views. and click Save.rvt. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. 8 On the File menu. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. click Save As. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. m_Revisions-in progress. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 7 Click OK. 3 In the small empty room. including revision number and revision date. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. Sketching Revision Clouds. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . enter 1200 mm. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. In most instances. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. and press ENTER. and expand Floor Plans. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. select the window.If Visible is not selected.

Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. 8 Click to place the second window. click near the windows you have changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. Tagging Revision Clouds.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. click Modify to end the command. you load a revision tag into the project. 11 In the drawing area. on the Edit toolbar. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the File menu. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Design Bar.rvt. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. click Finish Sketch. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. click Save. m_Revisions-in progress. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. 9 On the Design Bar.

5 In the Open dialog box. Working with Revisions. and drag it onto the sheet view. 2 On the Options Bar. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and because the revision is the first in the project. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. m_Revisions-in progress. and click OK. click New ➤ Sheet. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. the cloud is tagged as number 1. and click Open. under Floor Plans. scroll down to Revision Clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. select Level 1. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 8 In the drawing area. click Tags. you need to add one. 10 On the File menu. click Tag. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. 9 Click to place the tag. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. Working with Revisions In this exercise. You then issue a revision. click Save. 6 In the Tags.rvt. on which you place a revised view.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you create a sheet view in your project. 4 In the drawing area. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. verify that A0 Metric is selected. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. click to place the floor plan. A new sheet view is created in the project. 3 In the Tags dialog box. In the Tags dialog box. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. 4 Click Load. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. clear Leader. dialog box. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. Because you chose to number by project.

under Add. you can no longer modify it. click New. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. On the Settings menu. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. You can continue to add revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. clear Visible for each issued revision.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. click Revisions. enter a name for Issued to. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 14 Click OK. 9 Select Issued. you prevent further changes to the revision. On the Settings menu. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. click Revisions. You do this by issuing the revision. and click OK. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 15 On the File menu. click Close. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. NOTE After you issue a revision. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. 8 In the Revisions dialog box.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs. plywood. 345 . You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library. These components scale with the building model. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. Open m_Cape_House. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click First Floor. expand Views (all).Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you detail the foundation sill of a small house. you trace over the building model geometry. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. click the Training Files icon. expand Floor Plans.rvt located in the Metric folder. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. In the callout view. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. In order to detail from the building model. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. click Open. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. add detail components.

Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. click Modify and select the section line. 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line.2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 . 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration.

and select the callout border. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. select 1:5 for Scale. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. click Callout. click Modify. click Modify. 8 On the Options Bar. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. right-click in the Design Bar.

select the First Floor level line. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. click Modify and double-click the callout head. 16 In the view. The callout view is displayed. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. click View Properties. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog box.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View menu. 15 Click OK. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name.

as well as detail lines. They are also view specific.rvt. Exact dimensions are not important. siding. select Chain and click . 2 On the Design Bar. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. region objects. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. 3 In the Type Selector.17 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. which means that any detail components. Detailing the View. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. you detail the view of the foundation sill. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. and an anchor bolt. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Filled Region. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Detailing the View In this exercise. m_Cape_House. and insulation objects. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . sub-flooring. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Wide Lines. click Lines.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. select EARTH. If you are zoomed in too far. under Name and Pattern. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. select <Invisible lines>. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. the pattern does not display. 12 Click OK three times. 13 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. click Duplicate. enter Earth for Name. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. 14 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . click Edit/New.6 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box.

17 On the Options Bar. click . 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235.rfa. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 18 In the Open dialog box. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. click Detail Component. 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 21 In the Type Selector.

25 In the Type Selector.Section: 38x140. and place it in the detail view. select M_Dimension Lumber.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 .

TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select M_Plywood : 25mm. 27 In the Type Selector.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar.

click Repeating Detail. . ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. 38 In the Name dialog box. and click to place the lap siding. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. and click OK. click Modify. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. enter 19 mm for Thickness. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar.30 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. When you place the repeating detail component. Select Inside. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. 33 In the Type Selector. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. click Duplicate. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. click Edit/New. 35 On the Options Bar. click . and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. click Detail Component. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. enter Lap Siding for Name.

Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Detail Lines.rvt. they are view specific. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Detail Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. on the Design Bar. click Wide Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. m_Cape_House. meaning they display only in this view. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component.

8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard.4 On the View menu. 7 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. select Medium lines. click Detail Lines. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Filled Region. click View Properties. select . The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. 11 In the Type Selector. select Chain. 6 On the Design Bar. and click . 12 On the Options Bar. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration.

358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 21 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. click Edit/New. and click OK. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. 20 Click OK three times. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Gypsum-Plaster. 17 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Name and Pattern. enter Plasterboard for Name.

click Edit/New. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. select . Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click Region Properties. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 23 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 24 On the Options Bar. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Near the end of this lesson. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. under Modify Subcategories. click Line Styles. 29 In the Name dialog box. the region would be blank. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 26 On the Design Bar. 32 Click OK three times. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. you turn off the display of the model geometry.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 33 On the Design Bar. m_Cape_House. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. click Duplicate. click New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . enter Concrete for Name. select Concrete. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Filled Region. select Medium Lines. under Name and Pattern. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall.rvt. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field.

11 On the Options Bar. Adding Break Lines. you add break lines to the detail. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click and enter 28mm for Offset. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Select Black for Line Color. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. click Insulation. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. 8 On the Options Bar.4 Under Lines Styles. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. select Vapor Barrier. click Detail Lines.

click Detail Component. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration. and select the crop boundary of the detail view.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. m_Cape_House. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . verify that M_Break Line is selected. 2 In the Type Selector.rvt. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. select M_Break Line.

click Modify. 10 On the Tools toolbar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Do not display for Display model. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. and click OK. and select the break line. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing .9 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. When you turn the display model off. as shown in the following illustration.

5 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. m_Cape_House. Enter the text. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select 4 mm text for Text size. click to create a leader with two segments.rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Text. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. you add text notes to complete the detail. 3 On the Options Bar. Click again to set the location of the text box. 2 On the Type Selector. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. on the File menu. Adding Text Notes. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 .

2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. display in coarse detail. The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. click the Training Files icon. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Within a detail view. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. while other model elements. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. For example. and double-click Basement. expand Floor Plans.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. Open c_Office_Building. expand Views (all). or can display in front of or in back of specific components. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. such as walls and windows. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display.

Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. select it. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. on the Options Bar. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. click . The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. click . on the Options Bar. and when it highlights. 4 With the sink selected. behind the cabinet. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 .

Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. c_Office_Building. double-click Level 1. and a simple fill pattern. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View.rvt. a cabinet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Window menu. and overriding detail level settings. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. using halftone. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. 3 On the View menu. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 6 Proceed to the next exercise. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. select Tile. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. and click Apply. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . 10 Click OK. The door tags are not displayed. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. expand Floor Plans. and select Halftone. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 12 On the View menu. 9 Under Visibility. select Visibility/Graphics. click the Model Categories tab. select Visibility/Graphics.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. and double-click Level 1. scroll down to Furniture. expand Views (all). 13 On the View menu. click the Annotation Categories tab. 7 On the View menu.

Select Black for Line Color. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. select Coarse for Detail Level. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. Select 8 for Line Weight. 18 For Walls. Select Solid for Line Pattern. and click Apply. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. 21 Click OK twice. click the Model Categories tab.

Open m_Drafting_views. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. 4 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. Select 1:5 for Scale. After you create a drafting view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. on the File menu. is displayed in the Project Browser. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. expand Views (all). click Save As. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. click New ➤ Drafting View. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. named Door Detail. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. The new drafting view. click the Training Files icon. These details do not update with changes to the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . and expand Drafting Views.22 If you want to save your changes. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components.

you can change it. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. click Dimension. m_Drafting_views. When the dimension value displays in blue. click Detail Lines.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. After you create a dimension. right-click in the Design Bar. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing .rvt. 2 In the Type Selector. and click the tab in the context menu. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration.

and click OK. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 In the Name dialog box.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. under Name. 20 In the Type Selector. clear Length dimension snap increments. 11 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 Under Pattern Type. click Filled Region. verify Drafting is selected. Under Dimension Snaps. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. click Snaps. click Region Properties. click Duplicate. On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 18 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . and click OK. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK 3 times. click Finish Sketch. click . click Lines. enter Sand. click Edit/New. select Sand. 8 On the Options Bar.

24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. click Dimension. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.22 On the Design Bar.

Select the desired dimensions. and click OK twice. click Detail Lines. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. 31 On the Options Bar. and click Hide Object from the context menu. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 30 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. 34 In the Name dialog box. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. and click OK.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . click Edit/New. 27 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Hide/Isolate command. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. click . and on the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. enter 38 x 125. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box.

40 In the Type Selector. 41 Add two break lines as shown. select Break Line. click Detail Component.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . and drag it onto the sheet. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. click Modify to end the command. 48 Select Door Detail.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Sheet. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 43 In the Options Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. and expand Drafting Views. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. and click OK. click Text. click to create a leader with two segments. verify that A0 metric is selected. expand Views.

rvt. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. After you explode it. In order to modify it. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you must explode it. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. under Layer/Level Colors. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. The detail is imported as an import symbol. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. DXF. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.51 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Drafting_views. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. 7 On the View menu. Enter 5 for the Scale value. select m_Rail_detail. and then click Open. select New ➤ Drafting View. 3 Click OK. DGN. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. select Preserve colors. Select Custom for Scale. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ DWG.

The text retains the DWG layer color. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. press and hold CTRL. and then select the detail. click . click Modify. 15 In the Color dialog box. click Delete Element(s). and select all of the text blocks in the detail. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. 9 Right-click. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK 3 times. and click Full Explode.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. click Edit/New. select black. 10 If an error dialog box displays. 12 On the Options Bar. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines.

click Modify. and select the bottom text note. Creating a Reference Callout. click . 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown.Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. MET STUD FRAMING. 17 On the Options Bar. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . A leader is added to the text note. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown.

4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Section 1. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. and double-click the callout. click Modify. expand Sections. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. 3 On the Options Bar. select Reference other view. m_Drafting_views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. The section view is displayed.rvt. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. click Callout. expand Views (all). Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. 6 Select the callout.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. click Save As. Otherwise. close the exercise file without saving your changes.8 If you want to save your changes. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

381 . you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Scheduling 13 In this tutorial.

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. creating an instance schedule. you can list each component as a separate line item. When you schedule building components in Revit Building. You begin by creating an instance schedule. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. creating a type schedule. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

7 Click OK. select Windows. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. 5 Using the same process. under Category. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Finally. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 4 Under Available fields.rvt located in the Metric folder. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Comments and click Add. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Next. Open m_Schedules. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. right-click in the Design Bar. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click the Training Files icon. click Open. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. and click OK.

sorted by type mark.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. under Other. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 11 In the Project Browser. click Show. 16 Click OK twice. NOTE By clicking Show. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. The window schedule is displayed. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click View Properties. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Close. this can be a time-consuming process. in large building models with many views. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. on the Options Bar. However.

and click View Properties. clear Itemize every instance. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 22 Close the exercise file. click Save As.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. 20 Click OK twice. 21 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . The window type schedule is displayed. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

under Category. expand Floor Plans. select Number and click Add. 5 Under Available fields. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. and click OK. Open m_Schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Rooms. click the Fields tab. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. click Open. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. expand Views (all). TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Schedule/Quantities. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

you define the font for the schedule headers. next to Rows:. Next. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . 10 Click OK. click New. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 8 Click the Appearance tab. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. The room Number is 1. 9 To the right of Header text.6 Using the same process. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. because the room is not tagged with a room tag.

15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and select Conference from the list. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. None of the rooms have tags placed on them. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. double-click flr 3. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. and enter 30.12 Using the same process. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. add a second room. and enter Conference to change the room name.

23 In the Project Browser. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. click Room Tag. and verify that Horizontal is selected. and click Drafting. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. and click to place the room tag. select 29 Conference for Room. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. expand Schedules/Quantities. select 30 Conference for Room.

390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click flr 3. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Auto for Room. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. click Room Tag. 25 On the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 28 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Options Bar.

and select Circulation for Name. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. click . press and hold CTRL. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. under Floor Plans. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box.11 square meters. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . click Modify. and zoom in on the room. 30 In the Project Browser. click Modify. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. under Identity Data. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 35 With the room tags selected. select Services for Name. press and hold CTRL. 31 On the Design Bar. click . locate the room with an area of 92. 32 With the room tags selected. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click flr 3. select Office for Name.

and click Add. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. click the Key Name field. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Base Finish. 44 Using the same process. select Rooms. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. under Available fields. under Category. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. and enter Std Office. click Schedule/Quantities. press and hold CTRL. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. 39 Select Schedule keys. 45 On the Options Bar. Floor Finish. and Wall Finish.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. 43 In the new row. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Enter Paint for Wall Finish. click New to add a row to the schedule.

59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. 55 On the View menu. and click OK. under Available fields. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. 52 On the Options Bar. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. 56 Under Other. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 38. under Schedules/Quantities. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . under Other. 49 On the Options Bar. click Edit for Fields. select Exec Offices for Room Style. select Room Style. click Modify. and click OK. press and hold CTRL. 48 On the Design Bar. click . 51 On the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. click Modify. and click Add. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. double-click flr 3.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click View Properties.

Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Room Color Diagram. select Services from the list in the Room Style column.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

click PANTONE. and select the color legend. 5 In the alert dialog box. 7 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click OK. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. scroll all the way to the left.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 9 In the Color dialog box. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. click Color Fill. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click Edit Color Scheme. 11 Click OK three times. expand Floor Plans. under Views (all). and click the color green. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. m_schedules. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . and double-click flr 3. click the color button for Conference. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box.

select Walls. 16 Close the exercise file. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. Room no longer displays in the key/legend.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. To display graphics with metric values. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. on the File menu. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. 15 If you want to save your changes. 13 In the Room Schedule.rvt located in the Common folder. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click View. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. click Open. under Categories. double-click flr 3. click Save As. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. graphics are displayed with imperial values. and level. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. 4 Under Available fields. under Schedules/Quantities. and click OK. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. click the Training Files icon. number. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. right-click in the Design Bar. click the Fields tab. Open c_Schedules_2. double-click Room Schedule. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . under Other. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. 10 Click OK twice. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created. click Edit for Fields. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser.

398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click . and then click in the schedule. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule.Interiors.Interior Construction. under Views (all). 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. expand C10 . expand C1010 . All of the walls of this wall type are updated. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Brick Veneer w/ Stud. and select C1010115 . expand Floor Plans. expand C1010100 . 13 Click OK.Partitions . expand C . and double-click Level 1.Partitions.Fixed Partitions. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . expand C1010100. double-click Furniture Schedule. expand C10. under Identity Data. double-click Wall Schedule. 22 In the Project Browser. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. 17 On the Options Bar. and select C1010145 . 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.Partitions . click in the Assembly Code field. under Schedules/Quantities.16 Select one of the Interior . 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 21 Click OK three times. and then click . expand C1010. click Edit/New. expand C.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. click .

and click Properties. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click to place it. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule.24 In the Project Browser. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 29 Click OK twice. click Sheet. click Edit for Fields. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. right-click Furniture Schedule. and click OK. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. select Room for Select available fields from.

Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. and creating a multi-category schedule. 37 If you want to save your changes. 38 Close the exercise file. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . click Save As. and are defined and stored in an external file. These shared parameters can be added to any family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. adding the shared parameters to a family. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. you create a multi-category schedule.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. regardless of category. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template.

click New. and click OK. enter a file name. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. click Shared Parameters. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist.You create shared parameters. click New. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. ID. and assign Text for Type. Hinge. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. under Groups. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. click OK. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 9 Add three additional parameters. If you are working on a network. and click Save. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. and click OK. enter Closure for Name. click Create. 3 In the Save As dialog box. select Text for Type. add them to a door family. and then generate the multi-category schedule. enter Hardware. 10 After you add the parameters. 7 Under Parameters. and Lock Set.

Enter 1 for ID. and click OK. and click OK. click Close to close the file. Enter N/A for Closure. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. setting them as Type parameters.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. 23 On the File menu. click Open.rfa located in the Common folder. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. select Shared parameter. You are now working in the Family Editor. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. and click Select. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. 21 Click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. under Parameters. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. click Add. select ID. 13 Open c_ Door. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . select Instance. click Family Types. Enter Chrome for Hinge. click the Training Files icon. so that you can use it later in this exercise.

37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. 25 In the New dialog box. 33 Click OK. and click OK twice. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Multi-Category Tag. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. select Hardware. 35 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. ID). as shown. and click Open. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. select ID.e. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. 26 On Design Bar. select c_Hardware_Plan. 31 Under Parameters.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. 39 On the File menu. click Select. click Close to close the file.. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box.rft in the Annotations folder. click Lines.rvt located in the Common folder. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. under Parameter Group. and click Open. click Add. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. select Filter parameter. Open. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 41 In the Open dialog box. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. 36 On the Options Bar. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. the tag cannot attach to any component. click Label. click .

rfa that you just created. 45 In the Type Selector.42 On the File menu. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click OK. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. and click OK. click Tag. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window.rfa and NewDoor. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. 53 Click OK. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 47 Click to place the tag. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. select Multi-Category from the list. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields.

all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Schedule/Quantities. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. and double-click Level 3.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. based on wall area. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . expand Views (all). There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 .The multi-category schedule is displayed. click Open. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. However. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you create a level based door schedule. you create two schedules. The floor plan is displayed. on the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 54 If you want to save your changes.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . click Save As. click the Training Files icon. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson.

Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. Select equals in the second menu. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 12 Right-click the schedule. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. click Edit for Filter. 11 Under Field formatting.Level 3. enter Doors . click the Fields tab. and click OK. Under Name. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. select the following fields. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. 4 Click OK. 10 Under Fields. under Other. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. and select (none) for Filter. click the Filter tab. select Doors. Verify Schedule building components is selected. and click View Properties. select Hidden Field. select Level. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 15 Click OK twice. Select Level 3 in the third menu. 6 Under Available fields. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3.

you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. 11 Under Heading. m_First_Project-West_Wing. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 Click OK. 13 Click OK. m to more accurately represent the data. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. click the Fields tab. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase.rvt. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and then under Field Formatting. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. The schedule is displayed. 5 Under Available fields. Use the cost values in the following illustration. 10 Under Fields. click Schedule/Quantities. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. select the following fields. select Area. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. 12 Under Fields.16 On the Standard toolbar. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. select Walls. enter Cost/Sq. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Cost. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 9 Click the Formatting tab. Verify Schedule building components is selected.

select Total Cost. 19 Click OK.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. click Calculated Value. on the File menu. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. 24 In the Format dialog box. and click OK twice. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. 21 Under Fields. Select Fixed for Units. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 25 Click OK. under Other. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The schedule is displayed. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. you cannot use them to tag objects. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. 22 Under Field formatting. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. click Save As. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. 23 Click Field Format. click Edit for Fields. They cannot be shared with other projects and. and click View Properties. without the value it would have a unit of area. you learn how to schedule project parameters. Verify that Number is selected for Type. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. 29 Close the exercise file. 20 Click the Formatting tab. m column. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. unlike shared parameters. 28 If you want to save your changes.

you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. click the Training Files icon. click Open. Open m_Office_2. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Add to create the new parameter. and click Drafting. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration.rvt located in the Metric folder. either by entering it directly. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. 5 Click OK. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. click Room Tag. 4 Click OK. Occupant. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Project Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. After you create the schedule. Under Categories. Enter Occupant for Name.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise.

Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . click Save As. select Rooms to create a room schedule. click the Fields tab. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. 14 If you want to save your changes. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. under Categories. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 11 Under Available fields. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 15 Close the exercise file. on the File menu. and click OK. select the following fields. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities.

412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). 6 Click Finish. enter Revit_Project.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Next. click OK in the dialog box. 10 When the confirmation displays. 8 In the New Database dialog box. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). and click Next. click OK. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. and open the database in Microsoft Access. click the Training Files icon.mdb for Database Name. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code.rvt located in the Common folder. in addition to the Id column. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. 3 Click New. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. under Database. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. under Database Name. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. click Open. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. For example. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. select a location for the database file. Open c_Schedules_2. 9 Under Directories. 13 Close the exercise file. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. click Create. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. and click OK to create the database. Additionally. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. click the File Data Source tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 1 On the File menu.

413 . and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. click the Training Files icon. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. click Open. For example. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. expand Elevations.rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. Level 1 reads 1500 m. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. while Level 2 reads 4 m. and double-click South. and not 1504 m. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. Open m_simple_house. expand Views (all). Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. and not 4 m. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. For example. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

3 On the Options Bar.Shared. 12 On the View menu. 14 In the Type Selector. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project.Shared. you specify the new location of the project. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. enter Level . and press ENTER. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. click . By entering 10000 mm in this step. click Duplicate. 13 Select the Level 2 line. click Edit/New. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. The south elevation is displayed. select Level : Level . 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 Click OK twice. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Shared for Elevation Base. However. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. and click OK. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line.2 Select the Level 1 line. and you must create a new level type. By selecting the Level 1 line. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 10000 mm. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. under Constraints. 10 Select the Level 1 line. 6 In the Name dialog box. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. If you did that now. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project.

Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. under Elevations. In Revit Building. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 17 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.15 In the Project Browser. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. define the roof level as shared. permanent dimensions are created automatically. except when you sketch profiles to create families. 16 Using the same method. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In this case. on the File menu. as well as other views of the building model. double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. Dimensioning In this lesson. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. click Save As. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. that you can add to your drawings. Dimensioning | 417 . Open m_Dimensions. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. select it.rvt located in the Metric folder. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. and angular dimensions.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Open. select it. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. multi-segmented. By default. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. radial. click the Training Files icon. linear.

Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. The lock displays as locked. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. outside of the wall. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click the lock. A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. In addition. indicating that the dimension can be modified. The dimension displays in the drawing. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .5 Move the cursor to the left. and click to set the location of the dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. click Dimension.

and click to place the dimension. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. indicating that the segments are now equal. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Dimensioning | 419 . 11 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol.

13 On the View menu. 15 On the Design Bar. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. the default dimension option. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 16 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click Dimension. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. click Modify. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and zoom in around the curved wall. Select the inside face of the wall. and press DELETE.

Move your cursor to the right. and click to place the dimension. as shown in the following illustration. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. and click to place the dimension. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. Dimensioning | 421 . and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. click . The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar.

23 On the Design Bar. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. Each time you press TAB. However. but do not select anything. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. click Dimension.rvt. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. you learn to add. for a multi-segmented dimension. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and press TAB repeatedly. 2 On the Options Bar. delete. in some cases. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. including the wall centerline. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. select it. a different wall selection choice highlights. For example. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and change the origin of dimension witness lines. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. Controlling Witness Line Location. m_Dimensions. When you place dimensions.

9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. Dimensioning | 423 . and select it. click Modify.

12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall. but do not select it. The witness line moves to the wall centerline. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the inside wall face. 13 Click the control box again.

19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. m_Dimensions.rvt. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Dimensioning | 425 . 18 To end the editing command.15 Right-click the control box. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. The witness line is deleted. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. and click Delete Witness Line. If you right-click the control box. The full dimension string is displayed again. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Modifying Dimension Properties.

alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. 7 If you want to save your changes. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. Working with Alignments and Constraints. if two or more walls are colinear. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. click Save As. then Up for Read Convention. click . 5 Click OK twice. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Under Text. on the File menu. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . For example. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. a lock symbol immediately displays. click Edit/New. select Right. click Modify. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. when sketching walls. 6 On the Design Bar.2 On the Options Bar. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. and save the exercise file with a unique name. As you create components. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings.

indicating that the Align command is active. 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. click the Training Files icon. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. click Open. 3 Click the lock.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. Dimensioning | 427 . When you align two components. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. The symbol changes to a closed lock. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. 5 On the Options Bar. click . indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. while the second component moves to complete the alignment.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Alignment. select Multiple Alignment. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ .

11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. click Modify. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls.7 Select the short wall to the left. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). 10 On the Design Bar.

the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. select Multiple Alignment.12 On the toolbar. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. Move the walls to verify the alignment. 15 On the Options bar. click . click once to undo the move. Dimensioning | 429 . 13 Click the right wall. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar.

22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

The two windows align. and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click and repeat steps 27 . Dimensioning | 431 . 29 To view the constraint. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. indicating the constraint.28 to align the windows. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. on the Design Bar. A lock is displayed. 31 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. clear Multiple Alignment.

you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. as shown in the following illustration. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 33 Proceed to the next exercise.32 Align the remaining windows. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. m_Alignment.

8 If you want to save your changes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . select Openings. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. Select Entire Walls for Pick. Click Options. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. click Save As. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. the windows). Dimensioning | 433 . 5 Click OK. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. on the File menu. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. The two vertical walls highlight. 3 On the Options Bar. and then Widths.

434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Floor Plans.Annotating In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click . 3 On the Options Bar. click the Training Files icon. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration.rvt located in the Common folder. tag doors and windows. Open c_Area. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. expand Views (all). rotate tags with building components. click Open. click Dimension. and double-click Level 1.

6 Proceed to the next exercise. c_Area. and click to place the room tag. click Room Tag. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Annotating | 435 . Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan.rvt. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

4 On the Design Bar. 7 Continue to place room tags. and select the room tag. click Room tag. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. enter 101. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The room tag number displays in blue. and press ENTER. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. Click to place the new tag. click it. indicating that it can be edited. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported.

click Door. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. and select Leader. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. 2 In the Type Selector. click Door. and clear Leader. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. verify that Tag on placement is selected. as shown in the following illustration. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows. c_Area. 6 On the Options Bar. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. you learn how to place door and window tags. to add a tag with a leader. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Annotating | 437 . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.

click Tag All Not Tagged. select Window Tags. Notice that the door is placed without a tag.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The door is tagged with a tag and leader. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. clear Tag on placement. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . clear Create. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. click Tag All Not Tagged. and click OK. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then click OK. under Category. select Create. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Under Leader. 10 Place the door below Door 6. 16 Under Leader. click Door.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As.17 If you want to save your changes. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. Annotating | 439 . on the File menu.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

Viewing 15 In this tutorial. More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. 441 . you learn to create and customize views of building information models. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans.

A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. on the Standard toolbar. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. sections. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. 2 In the Project Browser. and three-dimensional (3D) views. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. click Open. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. expand Elevations. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. click . locate the Project Browser. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. you learn how to access different views of the building model. You create elevations. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click East. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . including elevation and three-dimensional views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view.

The default name of the view is {3D}. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. the east elevation. scroll down and clear Window Tags. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. click . Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Annotation Categories tab. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . This change is applied only to the active view. 7 Under Visibility. 8 Click OK. This change is applied only in this elevation view. and click Hidden Line. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view.

20 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. double-click My 3D View. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. and click OK. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. zoom. expand Views (all). 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. . and expand 3D Views. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. The view follows the movement of the cursor. You can pan. . you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. click X to close the view. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 13 Press and hold CTRL. right-click {3D}. enter My 3D View. 19 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.10 On the View toolbar. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. click to reorient the view. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box.

Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. eye height. as shown in the following illustration. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. outside of the dimension lines. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . and click View. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. m_Viewing_Exercise. Cameras define the eye point. After you specify the second point (the view target). expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and distance from the target.rvt. click Camera. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Views (all).

You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. Move the cursor up. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. click Dynamically Modify View. down. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing .4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. and sideways to see how the view changes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward.

Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. 13 On the View menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Tile. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Change the camera position. height. and target 12 On the Window menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Viewing a Building Model | 447 .10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view.

and click Show Camera. under Floor Plans. 17 In My 3D View. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. select the camera target point (the magenta grip).14 In the Project Browser. 16 Right-click. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click 3D View 1. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. and move it to another location. under 3D Views. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.

and click Properties. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Viewing a Building Model | 449 .3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. click Model Graphics Style. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Shading. In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 On the View Control Bar. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click to create a new 3D view. Click OK. under Camera. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. right-click. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.

A rotation tool is also displayed. and click OK. select Section Box. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. under Extents. A section box is displayed around the model. 24 Click the section box. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. as shown in the following illustration.22 On the View menu. click View Properties.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View. and maximize this view. Viewing a Building Model | 451 .26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Creating a Section View In this exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. double-click Level 1.

double-click the section head. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and click Open View. click Section. 8 Select the section line. View the section 5 To view the section. right-click. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. 6 Select the section view. expand Sections (Callout 1). 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. select Floor Plan: Level 1. or in the Project Browser. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. and click Find Referring Views. click Modify. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and double-click Section 1. 4 On the Design Bar.

10 Double-click the section head to display the section view.rvt. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 12 Select the section line. click Modify. click Elevation. double-click Level 1. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Notice the change in the view direction. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. click Modify. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Notice the change in section depth. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views.9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. m_Viewing_Exercise.

3 Without clicking in the drawing area. Elevation 1 .a by default. Do not select the arrow. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. under Elevations. double-click Level 1. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.b. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Elevation 1 . under Floor Plans.b. 5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Elevation 1 . 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. move the cursor around the building model. 7 In the Project Browser. and click. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. The elevation is named Elevation 1 .a. double-click the elevation symbol arrow.

you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. click Save As. roofs. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. where each layer is assigned a different material. such as Brick on CMU. on the File menu. a shade of gray. This includes walls. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. For example. in this case. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. and applies to phasing override materials as well. In addition. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. floors. and the insulation color to pink. in a compound wall. and other families.11 If you want to save your changes. such as the one below.

select Masonry . Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Materials dialog box. Open c_Showroom. and click OK twice. expand 3D Views. The surface pattern of the brick is black. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . click Open. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. expand Sections (Section Head . 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing .Brick for Name. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. and double-click 3D. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. expand Views (all). 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views.rvt located in the Common folder.Level 3. 5 In the Color dialog box. 4 Under Cut Pattern. 2 On the Settings menu. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. select red.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Materials. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. click Color.Filled).

The surface pattern of the brick is now white. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . 9 In the Materials dialog box. click Materials. c_Showroom. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. 10 Under Surface Pattern. select white. click Color. 11 In the Color dialog box. select Masonry . and double-click Level 1.Brick for Name. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. expand Views (all). and click OK twice. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type.rvt. expand Floor Plans. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.

11 Zoom in on the arced wall. and click Properties. under Graphics. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Graphics. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 12 If you want to save your changes. including the current view. select Solid fill. click Modify. and click OK. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. and click Fine. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . on the File menu. click Edit/New. under Floor Plans. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. By default. double-click Level 2. click Save As. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 5 In the Color dialog box. and click OK three times. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. right-click. select a shade of gray. click Detail Level.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click .

or pattern. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. although they may have coincident edges. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. and you cannot control their visibility. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you create more than one plan region in a file. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. line type. refer to the online Help for more information. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. line color. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 .Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view.

and double-click Level 1.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . expand Floor Plans. Open m_Plan_Region. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. the south elevation is also displayed. click Open. and click View. In the following illustration. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. expand Views (all). click Plan Region. right-click in the Design Bar. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm.rvt located in the Metric folder.

and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. The plan region is no longer visible. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Press ESC to end the command. 3 In the Level 1 view. 7 In the View Range dialog box. click . As the cursor moves across it. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. right-click. 5 Select the red dashed line. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. You use the view range property to control cut plane. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. click Edit for View Range.Plan regions have a single property. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. view range. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. On the Options Bar. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. under Extents. By selecting Parent View’s Level. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . 10 On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice. and click Properties. the top and bottom clip planes. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. click Modify. and the view depth plane. top and bottom clip planes. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 9 Click Apply. that is similar to the view range for plan views.

462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . on the File menu.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. click Save As. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 11 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. 463 . and posters. to place and render decals to create signs. billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model.

Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. the floor. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you select a scene that defines the model environment. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. When you complete these changes. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. After you create the perspective view.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. click the Training Files icon. under Construction. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click Edit for Structure. click Wall. and click the tab in the context menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. 3 On the Options Bar.Cavity Wall . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . verify that Co-house . Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Open m_Cohouse. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Brick. and click Edit/New. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time.

click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. select Masonry . click Materials. click Duplicate. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. and click . 9 Under AccuRender. click Edit for Structure. under Name. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 11 Under Name. 24 In the Material Library. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 14 On the Options Bar. under Name. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. 26 Click OK twice. select Site .Brick. under _accurender. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 8 In the Materials dialog box. under _accurender. 18 In the Materials dialog box. 12 Click OK twice. click Materials. 19 Click OK four times. enter Aluminum.Asphalt. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. 23 Under AccuRender. under Name. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 25 Under Name. select Carib. expand Metals. select Polished. and click Aluminum. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. for Layer 2. click Edit/New.Plain.200mm.Running.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. select the curtain wall mullion again. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. . Polished and click OK. under Construction. expand Masonry and click Brick. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. click next to Texture to display the Material Library.

37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. select Aluminum. Polished. select Exterior under Type. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. verify that New is selected. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. floor. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. click .29 On the Options Bar. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. floor. 33 Click OK three times. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. producing a photorealistic effect. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. . and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. under Materials and Finishes. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. click No. click Edit/New. under Name. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click in the Material field. click Region Raytrace.

Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. expand Floor Plans. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Views (all). Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. Adding Trees to the Site. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse.rvt. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Cnst. when you render an exterior view of the model. and double-click 1st Flr. you place two different types of trees on the building site. In a later exercise.38 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

click Site Component. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click Site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. 4 In the Type Selector. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click to place a tree. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 .9 Meters. right-click in the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site. select M_Tree .Deciduous : Acer Rubrum .

15 Under Other. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. select Oak. click Modify. 10 In the Name dialog box. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. to . under Identity Data.rvt. select any of the deciduous trees. select Black Oak for Type Comments. enter Black Oak.Create a new type of tree. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and place two black oak trees. 7 In the Type Selector. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Plant Library. as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. and click OK twice. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click Deciduous. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. under accurender. and then click display the Plant Library. click Edit/New. under Other. 13 Under Name. click Duplicate. expand Trees and Shrubs. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click Site Component. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. Black. click in the Value field for Plant Name. m_Cohouse. Creating a Perspective View.

Cnst. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. The new perspective view is displayed.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. view open. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera.

472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Show Camera. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. view.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. date. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . right-click 3D View 1. you select a scene and specify time. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Exterior. and click Rename. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Exterior. and click OK. and environment settings that you use to render the view.7 In the Project Browser. lighting.rvt. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. under 3D Views.

5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 7 Under Date. and click Sun. 6 Select By Date. click Settings. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click the Solar Angles tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Time.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 8 Under Time. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. under Scene Settings.

00 (many clouds. and click OK. 13 Enter . click No. click Environment. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. MA. The Ground Plane tab displays. 10 Click in the Cities list. 21 Click OK twice. click Raytrace. under _accurender. 19 In the Material Library. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.) 14 Click OK. and click OK. 16 In the Environment dialog box. and enter bo. select Autumn for Plant Season. USA.20 for Cloudiness. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. under Scene Settings. under Background Color. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Scene Settings. 17 Under Advanced. click Image Size. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click . select Ground Plane. Dark. select Good for Quality. Rye. click Site. 20 In the Name list. and select Boston. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 26 On the Design Bar. 11 Scroll down. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. select Grass. 18 Click Material.9 Click the Place tab. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1.

you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Rendering an Interior View. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. define the view and render scene settings. and finally. To create the rendered scene. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Capture Rendering.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. expand Renderings. 30 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 32 If you want to save this exercise. click Save As. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. Adding RPC People In this exercise. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. on the File menu. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson.

and double-click 2nd Flr. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). expand Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 Repeat steps 4 . select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 5 On the Options Bar. m_Cohouse. click Component. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Rotate after placement. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all).rvt. Cnst. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table.

Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.rvt. click Camera.8 Proceed to the next exercise. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. Cnst. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. double-click 2nd Flr. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.The interior perspective is displayed. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. enter Interior. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. 12 On the View menu. 14 On the Design Bar. click to display the 3D view of the building model. click Modify.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 11 On the View menu. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click the dimensions for Size. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. select Section Box. under Extents. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. right-click 3D View 1. enter 178 mm for Height. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. Grips are displayed on the section box. enter 229 mm for Width. and click Rename. under Size. and select the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model. and click OK. click View Properties. and click OK.

Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. you create a render scene to specify the time. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. you reduce the rendering time.rvt. place.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . m_Cohouse. and environment settings used to render the view. By limiting the geometry. under 3D Views. date. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a New Render Scene.

16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 12 Scroll down. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. under accurender. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. under 3D Views. and select Boston. click Environment.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select {3D}. select Grass. 13 Click the Settings tab. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. under Scene Settings. and click OK. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. m_Cohouse. 10 Click the Place tab. and enter bo. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. You can select families with transparent materials. The Ground Plane tab displays. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 11 Click in the Cities list. select Ground Plane. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. MA. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. such as windows and doors. and click Save. Time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. select Interior. select New. 4 Under Type. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. 18 Under Advanced. USA.rvt. Dark. 9 Under Time. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click Settings. 20 In the Material Library. 22 Click OK twice. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Rye. on the Main tab. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. under Background Color. click Site. click the Solar Angles tab. as daylight sources. 24 Under Scene Settings. under Use View’s Section Box. click OK. under Scene Settings. 19 Click Material. 8 Under Date. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 21 In the Name list. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. and click Sun. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. and click OK. 7 Select By Date. double-click {3D}. 17 In the Environment dialog box. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. 14 Click Save. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Summer for Plant Season. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. and enter Interior Scene for Name.

Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. double-click Interior. which can take several minutes. 7 On the Design Bar. begins. click Raytrace. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. When radiate completes. the following rendered view is displayed. click OK. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . click Daylights. . The radiosity process. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. Curtain Wall 1). 8 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. click Radiate. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution.

10 Close the exercise file. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. on the File menu. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. In a plan view. The walkthrough path is a spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building.9 If you want to save your changes. but you can also define it in a 3D. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. elevation. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. or section view. click Save As. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. you must select or define a scene.

click Open. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. and double-click 1st Floor. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . click the Training Files icon.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. If you prefer to use Metric values. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Floor Plans. and ends in the far corner of the living room. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. proceeds through the dining room. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. or the first key frame. click Walkthrough. and click the tab in the context menu.rvt located in the Common folder. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and change unit formats as desired. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. Open c_Townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units. of the walkthrough. and click to specify the start point. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

11 Under Change. verify Field of view is selected. and click OK. If it is not. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). click . 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Walkthroughs. and select the crop boundary. select the crop boundary. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Walkthrough 1. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. on the Options Bar. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 On the View menu. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room.

Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . 16 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. 17 Click . The walkthrough plays. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. c_Townhouse.13 On the Options Bar. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1 for Frame. press ESC. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough.rvt. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. proceed to the next exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 14 Click . The current display is wireframe with hidden lines.

clear Far Clip Active. double-click 1st Floor. click . 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). click Edit Walkthrough. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 2 On the Options Bar. You can move any camera target or key frame position. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. under Extents. select Path for Controls.

perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. The AVI is recorded. When you export the walkthrough. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. specify 10 for Frames per Second. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 4 Under Format. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. 2 In the Save As dialog box. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. 9 On the Options Bar. under Walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 1 On the File menu. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. Recording the Walkthrough. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. specifying the number of frames. and click Save. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.7 Click the third key frame position. click Save As. shaded. shaded with edges. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. on the File menu. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 3 Under Output Length. double-click Walkthrough 1. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. or with AccuRender raytracing. click Edit Walkthrough. hidden line.rvt. c_Townhouse. reducing the size of the image. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . click Export ➤ AVI. to play the walkthrough. select <Shading> for Display mode. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. length. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. and details. there are several options for expressing the architecture. For the realistic approach. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. To express texture beyond material specifics. Advanced Model Graphics. In this series of exercises. In this tutorial. sections. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. or the client. a consultant. Co-house. and Section Boxes. elevations. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. 491 . Using the pre-built building model. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. Whether the audience is the general contractor." In Revit Building. type. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. an outside reviewer. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. the Linework Tool. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. you explore the stylistic approach.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. you create a presentation floor plan.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Open. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. expand Views (all).Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. you create a copy of the plan. Cnst. and click Duplicate. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. expand Floor Plans. right-click 2nd Flr. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Cohouse.

Notice that no annotations display in this view.rvt.2 In the Project Browser. and click Save. under Floor Plans. sections. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 11 In the Save As directory. 10 On the File menu. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. This turns off the visibility of all tags. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 8 Click OK. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. and click OK. and clear DOWN Text. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. Using Advanced Model Graphics. and click Rename. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. this represents the view getting smaller. click Save As. elevations. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . click Visibility/Graphics. and so on in this view. Down Arrow. expand the Stairs category. 7 Under Visibility. dimensions. UP Text. and Up Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Cnst. click the Scale control and select 1: 100.

click for Place. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. MA. click the Place tab. Within a Project. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. Under Shadows Properties. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify 35 for Shadow. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. double-click it in the Project Browser. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. select By Date. Time and Place. 2 On the View Control Bar. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click . Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. under Sunlight Settings. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. 7 Select Boston. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Under Intensity. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. The higher the number. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. you can create. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. and click Advanced Model Graphics. modify. select Cast Shadows.rvt. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. the darker the shadows. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. USA for City. At that place.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. click OK. under Sunlight Settings. click Save. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click OK. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. under Sun and Shadows Settings.NOTE For this step. be aware that if you enter a different city. you can enter any city you wish. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. . click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 10 Click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. Cnst. and click OK. 16 On the File menu. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. however. for At Level. clear Ground Plane. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.

Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click View. click Sheet. and click to place it. select Arch Portrait. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click Add View to Sheet. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. and click OK. 4 In the Views dialog box. and notice a view title displays. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. click Add View. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.

under Graphics. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . and click OK. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. select No for Show Title. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. For this analytique. 12 In the Name dialog box. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. click . click OK. click Edit/New. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. enter Presentation. To accomplish this.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. and the boundary of the region. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. and select Chain.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. If necessary. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 17 In the Type Selector. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. click . 19 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. click Filled Region. select Invisible Lines. 18 On the Options Bar. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. click . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. fill properties.

23 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 21 On the Design Bar. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. click OK. click Save. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Solid Black. click Region Properties. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Edit/New. 24 In the Name dialog box. 33 On the File menu. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 .TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. and click Properties. 29 On the Design Bar. under Graphics. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. scroll down. click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. and click Deactivate View. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. under Name. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you are finished drawing the chain. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and click OK. under Identity Data. select Solid Fill. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click OK. and click OK.

Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. right-click South. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view.rvt. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . expand Elevations. under Views (all).

and click OK. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 Click OK.2 In the Project Browser. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Visibility/Graphics. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. expand the Walls category. By changing the angle of the sun. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 6 Under Visibility. and click OK. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. under Visibility. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. click . select Cast Shadows. right-click Copy of South. and clear Elevation Swing. click Duplicate. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. and clear Surface Pattern. and click Rename. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. specify 35 for Shadow. scroll up. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. scroll down. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 11 Under Shadow Properties. under Elevations. 15 In the Name dialog box. on the Model Categories tab. 12 Under Intensity. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. click OK. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 .

expand Sheets. and click Add View to Sheet. and double-click A105 . you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 19 Proceed with the next exercise.18 On the File menu. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Add View. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Presentation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane.rvt. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Save. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog box. under Views (all). Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise.

Notice the viewport displays a view title. 5 In the Type Selector. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . Notice the view title no longer displays. select Viewport: Presentation.

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. click Modify. click Save. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 7 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique.

select 1: 100 for Scale. 4 Add the section shown below. 3 On the Options Bar. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . click Section.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt. Cnst. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 1st Flr. and use the flip arrows if necessary. under Floor Plans. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.

Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. and double-click Section 2. 7 On the Options Bar. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Section 2 is added to the building model. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Callout. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. select 1: 100 for Scale. To accomplish this. To fit correctly in the analytique.

click the Model Categories tab. and clear Elevation Swing. scroll down. expand the Doors category. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. 15 Under Visibility. under Sections (Callout 1). 16 Under Visibility. expand the Walls category. scroll up. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 .Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. and click Rename. click Visibility/Graphics. and clear Surface Pattern. 12 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. right-click Callout of Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. enter Presentation Section 2.

Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. Notice the crop region no longer displays. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. click Save. 19 Click OK. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. click . and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 22 In the Element Properties dialog box.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 23 On the File menu. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

2 On the View Control Bar. select Directly. select Cast Shadows. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Under Shadows Properties. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. and click Advanced Model Graphics. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. click Apply. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . Click Apply. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. open the Project Browser and. select Relative to View. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. and click OK.rvt. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Intensity. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. In addition. under Sections (Callout 1). you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. click Duplicate. In the steps that follow. under Sunlight Settings. double-click Presentation Section 2.

under Silhouette Edges. Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click Save. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. and click OK. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. NOTE The line style. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 10 On the File menu.

click Modify. 3 In the Views dialog box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. select Section: Presentation Section 2.rvt. 5 In the Type Selector.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. select Viewport: Presentation. and click to place the selected view. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. The view title no longer displays. 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all). and click Add View to Sheet.

and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. you click to specify the start radius. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. click . Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. under Sections (Callout 1). 9 On the Edit toolbar. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. and press ENTER. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. Using a clock as a reference. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. In the steps that follow.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees. under Sheets (all). Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 .Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.

you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and drag it up and to the left as shown. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template. click Save. After applying the view template to a new section view. click Modify. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 16 On the File menu. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Type 1). 7 In the Rename View dialog box. click Save as View Template. double-click Presentation Section 2. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . right-click Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 On the View menu. and click OK. Now. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Apply View Template. right-click Copy of Section 1. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. enter Presentation. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). enter Presentation Section 1. and click Rename. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. and click Duplicate.

Presentation. and elevation swings no longer display. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. 14 In the Type Selector. and click OK. under Sheets (all). 15 Right-click the viewport. double-click A105 . select Section: Presentation Section 1. 16 On the View menu. Notice the furniture. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. annotations. and click Activate View.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. 12 In the Views dialog box. and click OK. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. 18 Right-click the viewport. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . lighting fixtures. and click Deactivate View. select Presentation. under Graphics. select Viewport: Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . In this exercise. such as a tracery window or column capital. Working in a Callout Analytique. click Save. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail.20 On the File menu.

2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. enter Presentation Callout. click Callout. and click Rename. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. under Sections (Type 1). double-click Section 1. right-click Callout of Section 1. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Modify. 4 In the Project Browser. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. select the callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. After you add the callout. and click OK.

This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. and click OK.6 In the Project Browser. 8 Right-click. clear Crop Region Visible. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. under Extents. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Presentation Callout. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . and click View Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.

select Section: Presentation Callout. click Modify. double-click A105 . and click Activate View. click View Properties. 12 In the Views dialog box. 17 On the View menu. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. select Custom for View Scale. under Sheets (all). and move it into the position shown below.Presentation. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. select Viewport: Presentation. and click OK. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.

sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. click Region Properties. select Solid Black for Type. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. In the steps that follow. 23 On the Design Bar. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. under Sections (Callout 1). and make adjustments as necessary. double-click Presentation Callout. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. activate the viewport. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 .NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. When finished. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms.

and click Activate View. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. and sketch the rectangle shown below.Presentation. click . click Filled Region. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 29 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 . 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

select Crop Region Visible. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. click Finish Sketch. under Extents. 33 Select the crop region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box.30 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . and click OK. 31 On the View menu. click View Properties. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

click View Properties. and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. and click OK. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. under Extents. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 38 Proceed with the next lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 37 On the File menu. clear Crop Region Visible.34 On the View menu. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click Save.

s and apply shadows to the views. double-click Isometric. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 3 On the View Control Bar. 2 On the View menu. and click 1: 200.rvt. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. click Orient ➤ Southwest. under 3D Views. click the Scale control. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

click View Properties. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 18 On the View menu. for At Level. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. 9 Click OK. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. Under Shadows Properties. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Select Relative to View. under 3D Views. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. enter Isometric 1. 15 In the Project Browser. and click OK. under Silhouette Edges. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. click Duplicate. specify 35 for Shadow. Cnst.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. under 3D Views. and click Rename. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 14 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Name dialog box. under 3D Views. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. click . Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. and click Rename. right-click Isometric. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Isometric 2. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Duplicate. Under Intensity. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Select 1st Flr. Select Ground Plane. double-click Isometric 2. select Section Box. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under Extents. select Cast Shadows. right-click Isometric 1. under Sunlight Settings.

TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. click Modify on the Design Bar. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box.20 Select the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown.

NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. select Crop Region. under 3D Views. select Crop Region. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. and click Duplicate. enter Isometric 3. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click View Properties. under 3D Views. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 23 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. double-click Isometric 3. make a copy of the view. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. under 3D Views. and click OK. Notice the section box no longer displays. double-click Isometric 2. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. 31 On the View menu. 25 In the Project Browser. clear Crop Region Visible. 29 Select the section box. the stairs and railings may display. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you are finished. under Extents. right-click Isometric 2. under Extents. 22 In the Project Browser. and click OK. either adjust the plane location. click View Properties. In such a case.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click OK. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 On the View menu.

36 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Project Browser. in the Type Selector.Next. under 3D Views.Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. under Sheets (all). Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . in the Type Selector. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. select Viewport: Presentation. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . under 3D Views. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. in the Type Selector. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. 35 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.

click Edit. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Activate View. and then click Edit/New. 43 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 44 Using the drawing tools. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. This will make it easier to draw lines. click Lines. click Region Properties. 38 Select the poche filled region. 39 On the Design Bar.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. select Concrete for Type. under Graphics. select Transparent for Background. 42 Click OK twice. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. The image below shows the lines redrawn.

49 On the File menu. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. a cutaway perspective view.45 On the Design Bar. you add it to the presentation sheet. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. click Finish Sketch. click Save. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 47 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. select Solid Black for Type. you create the final view for the analytique. and click Deactivate View. click Region Properties. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise.

rvt. then you specify the eye direction and range. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. double-click 1st Flr. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The view opens immediately. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. under Floor Plans. Cnst. click Camera. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Override Silhouettes. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. Under Intensity. 5 On the View Control Bar. click . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Cast Shadows. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. under Silhouette Edges. and click OK. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Shadows Properties. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.

You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. A section box now cuts through the building model. under Extents. click View Properties. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 12 Select the section box. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Section Box.

15 On the Options Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. After placing it.14 Select the crop boundary. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. clear Crop Region Visible. under 3D Views. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. 18 On the View menu. under Change. you must specify the actual size of the image. 17 Under Size.Presentation. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). and click OK. click Size. enter 165 mm for Width. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. 21 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . under Extents.

4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select the same font as the title. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Text. click Duplicate.rvt. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. Annotating the Analytique. under Text. enter Description. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click .22 On the File menu. under Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. select a font. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Title. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. click OK. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. and click OK. click Save. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. and click OK. enter Title. specify a text size of 40 mm. 5 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. specify a text size of 6 mm.

This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . 17 On the Design Bar. click Save. 18 On the File menu.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Description.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. In this tutorial. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. each with a different size. thus the term family. material set. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. shape. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. they are still related and come from a single source. 539 .About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based.

All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. Using the Family Editor. and roofs are examples of these types of families. and when and how to use it. for example. exceptions to this rule. exterior.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. generic. For example. floors. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. such as a dome roof.rfa extension. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. Walls. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. while many more are stored in component libraries. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. because there is only one file to track. has wall types that define interior. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. floors. This makes file management much easier. The basic walls system family. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. foundation. and roofs. In this lesson. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. and partition wall styles. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. There are. however. but you cannot create new system families. You also learn about the Family Editor. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . In addition.

An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. for example. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . Host-based families have components that require hosts. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. You create in-place families only within the current project. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. custom wall treatments. Standalone families include columns. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. and furniture. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. and also a standalone furniture family component. You can load them into projects. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an .Family templates are either host-based or standalone. transfer them from one project to another. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall.rfa extension. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. trees.

Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. you can double-click any file with an . In this case. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you learn about the Family Editor. If you find a close match. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can click File ➤ Open. such as newsgroups. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. select the appropriate template. In this section. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 3 Next. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . and when to use it. In this exercise. if you change the original family. 2 On the File menu. it should be available within the Type Selector. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. consider checking the web library and other web resources. navigate to a family file. it is saved with the project. how to access it. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. Within the Windows® environment. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. Load Family command on the File menu. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. you can drag it into the document window. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. how to access it. However. presume it is a bay window that you require. such as plan. you learn when to use the Family Editor. To add a family to your project. modify it as needed. and then load it into the project. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. To start a new family.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. 5 Finally. it opens within the Family Editor. elevation. if you have exhausted your external resources. With Revit Building open. and click Open. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. and click Open. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. open it in the Family Editor. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. In the final exercise. After the family has been loaded in the project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or 3D. or you can load it using the Load From Library. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. When the family opens.

3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. 545 . not within the Family Editor. you create it within the project file.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. a lighting fixture. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. When you create an in-place family. You create a furniture family. you learn how to create a different type of component. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In addition. In each lesson. and several annotation families. Using the installed templates. you create an in-place family.

You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . height. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. and thickness. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.Creating a Door Family In this lesson.

9 In the Type Selector. and click Open. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Symbolic Lines. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Labelled dimensions. Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Tile. 6 Maximize the window. click . 10 On the Options Bar. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. 2 On the File menu. Creating a Door Family | 547 . click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. are also displayed. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Door. Notice the four tiled views. part of the door properties. click New ➤ Family. Floor Plan: Ref. select Doors [projection]. and represent the door opening profile. 5 On the Window menu. 4 On the View menu. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 7 Enter ZF.rft.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families.

click Dimension. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. select Width for Label. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 19 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 17 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 549 . select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening.

so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. click . you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click the down arrow button. as shown. When drawing an arc from center and end points. click Symbolic Lines. 24 Enter SI. then you specify each end point. and select the command from the menu. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. along with the witness line controls. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. In the image below. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. you first specify the arc center. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 22 In the Type selector. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Plan Swing [cut].

5 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations.1 In the Project Browser. and click . click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. double-click Left. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. enter 50 mm for Depth. under Specify a new Work Plane. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. Creating a Door Family | 551 . 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. select Thickness for Label. double-click Ref. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Level. click Modify and select the dimension. 14 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Floor Plans.10 On the Design Bar.

Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. click OK. It also defines its appearance when rendered. and click OK. and click OK. click for Texture. under AccuRender. 20 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. Medium. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click Visibility. 9 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and clear Plan/RCP. 19 Under Detail Levels. select Front/Back. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Materials.Red/Stained. under Materials and Finishes.No Gloss. Left/Right. and Fine are selected. under Name. and When cut in Plan/RCP. click . Creating a Door Family | 553 . Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 6 Click OK.Dark. 7 In the Materials dialog box. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. click . enter Oak Door for Name. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Duplicate. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. click OK. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. The solid geometry of the door is now complete.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. verify that Coarse. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Oak Door. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you assign a material to the door leaf. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. for Material. select Panel for Subcategory.

click the Model Graphics Style control. 21 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). select Oak Door for Name. click OK. and select Shading with Edges. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click . click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .15 On the Options Bar. and click OK. double-click View 1. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. for Material. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. under 3D Views. The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material.

Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Under Other. By flexing the new component. Click Apply. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Under Other. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Click Apply. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. enter 2000 mm for Height. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 24 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 27 Click OK. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. enter 2500 mm for Height. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it.

Click Apply. under Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog box. click Door. Click Apply. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. 6 In the Name dialog box. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 18 In the Open dialog box. enter 2134 mm for Height. Click Apply. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. 5 Under Family Types. Enter 925 mm for Width. click Save. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Under Create new. 4 In the Family Types dialog box.rte is the Template file. 12 On the File menu. 8 Under Family Types. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. click New. enter 2000 mm for Height. Enter 1220 mm for Width. select it. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. and click OK. verify that DefaultMetric. 17 On the Options Bar. click New. Training Door. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 2100 mm for Height. and click OK. 9 In the Name dialog box. click Load. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 750 mm for Width. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. and click Open. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. 11 Click OK. click Wall. Training Door. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click New. select Project. 15 In the New Project dialog box. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Define the second new door type. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. and click OK. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. under Template file.rfa. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. Define the third new door type. click New ➤ Project. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name.rfa. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.

21 On the View toolbar. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. and select Shading with Edges. 23 On the Design Bar. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. click . select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 24 In the Type Selector. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. Creating a Door Family | 557 . click Door. 26 In the Type Selector. 22 On the View Control Bar.

Creating a Window Family In this lesson. height. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and specify values for the window width.28 In the Type Selector. 30 You can close all files without saving. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. Creating a Door Family. and mullion offset. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. glazing and mullions as extrusions. default sill height. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. and create the window sash as a sweep. You create the window frame. This completes the lesson. Finally.

and click Open. Creating a Window Family | 559 . click Tile. The window type has a variable height and width. 2 On the File menu. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. 7 Enter ZF. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder.rft. 4 On the Window menu. Select Metric Window. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. you specify the parameters for the new window family. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. are also displayed. part of the window properties. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Labelled dimensions. Four views are tiled on your display. equally spaced vertical mullions. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. 5 On the View menu.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.

Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. This process is called “flexing the model. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. and click Apply.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 1300 mm for Height. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. This is the starting point for the new window. The label name. 12 Click OK. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Height and Default Sill Height. click Family Types. also one of the window properties. is one of the type parameters. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. and click Apply. Click Apply. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Change the height and width values again. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. When you add labels to dimensions. then sketching the sweep profile. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar.

click Sketch 2D Path. 12 On the Options Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. and specify an offset of 50 mm. select Elevation: Right. click . click Sketch Profile. and click Open View. 2 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. Snap the cursor to each corner. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. click . 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 6 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. click Ref Plane. click Finish Path. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 9 On the View Control Bar. click the Scale control. Creating a Window Family | 561 . 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and select 1:10.

click Modify. click Dimension. 23 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. and select the dimension. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar.14 On the Design Bar. and select the reference plane. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. enter Sash for the Name. select Prefer: Wall faces. under Identity Data. select Chain and click . 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 Below the red dot. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click . 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane.

the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. When the lock displays. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. However.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. Creating a Window Family | 563 . and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 25 On the Design Bar. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. click Modify. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. the exact dimensions are not critical.

When the lock displays.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. click Dimension. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. 29 On the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select the line you want to move. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. TIP After adding the dimension. and specify the dimension value. as shown. click Modify.

Creating a Window Family | 565 . click . When the lock displays. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. and double-click View 1. 35 On the Design Bar. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. If necessary. under Views (all). Next. click Finish Sweep. zoom out until it displays. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. this is the top of the window opening. 37 In the Project Browser. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value. click the lock to constrain the present value. 33 On the Tools toolbar. expand 3D Views. When the lock displays. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. click Finish Profile. 36 On the Design Bar. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.Modify each dimension if necessary.

Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. and enter . 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. click . click Set Work Plane.45 mm for Depth. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and select Lock. 2 On the Design Bar. Chain of walls or lines. 5 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. press TAB to cycle through the selection options.38 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and select the option. double-click Exterior.

■ Click . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.50 mm for Offset. Enter . set the following options: ■ ■ Click . Creating a Window Family | 567 .The entire sash outline is selected. and lock icons display on each line. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.

12 Proceed to the next exercise. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Elevations. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. click Finish Sketch. 11 In the Project Browser.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. 10 In the Project Browser. The window sash extrusion is now complete. double-click Right.

Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Window Family | 569 . double-click Right. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and enter 30 mm for Offset. 3 On the Options Bar.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. click Ref Plane. click . as shown. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. under Elevations.

6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension.5 On the Design Bar. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

16 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. enter 12 mm for Depth. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Modify. click Lines. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and select Lock. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 15 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. double-click Exterior. click . 8 Select the reference plane. and click to create the glass boundary. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines.7 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click . 9 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. under Identity Data.

under 3D Views. 20 Select the glass extrusion. double-click View 1. click Modify. under Identity Data.18 On the Design Bar. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. double-click Right. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. After the family is loaded into a project. click . specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 On the Options Bar. View the window model with frame. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Project Browser. sash.

27 In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1000 mm for Height. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Other. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 573 . it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. enter 1500 mm for Height. NOTE After flexing the model. Under Other. click Family Types. Click Apply. For example.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 2000 mm for Width. 26 In the Family Types dialog box.

NOTE When you draw each reference plane. After adding the dimension. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. the exact location is not critical. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click Dimension. under Elevations. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

..5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. click Modify. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 575 . 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values.> for Label. 9 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown.

click Family Types. Under Group parameter under. 15 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the dimension value. Select Instance. and enter 350 mm as the new value. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. select Dimensions. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. enter Mullion Offset for Name. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. under Dimensions. and click OK. click Modify. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice the dimension value becomes editable. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Family parameter. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. Under Parameter Data.

24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name.17 On the Options Bar. and click . it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. As you did before. enter 14 mm for Depth. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. 20 On the Design Bar. However. 18 On the Design Bar. select Mullion Offset for Label. click Lines. After you complete the sketch. under Specify a new Work Plane. move the dimension value as shown. click Modify. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Window Family | 577 . 23 On the Options Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash.

26 On the Design Bar. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Move the dimension values as shown. click Modify. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal. select <Add parameter> for Label. 29 On the Design Bar.

Under Group parameter under. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. Remember. select Family parameter. and on the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. select Dimensions. Select the dimension. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. Under Parameter Data. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. select Mullion Width for Label. Select Type.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. This is changed in later steps. enter Mullion Width for Name. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. click Finish Sketch. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Creating a Window Family | 579 .

it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. click Family Types. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. or undoing the same. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. evenly spaced. Click Apply. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. NOTE After flexing the model. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. and click Apply. enter 1500 mm for Height. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. and aligned with the sash edge. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Under Other. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. In this case. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. under Specify a new Work Plane. 42 On the Options Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. as shown. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. and click OK. 46 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 44 On the Design Bar. click . click Dimension. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. Under Other.37 In the Family Types dialog box. click Dimension. 39 On the Design Bar. 41 On the Design Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. Creating a Window Family | 581 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Lines. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click OK. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. Enter 2000 mm for Width.

click Modify. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Mullion Width for Label. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. Remember. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select the dimension you added in the previous step. and on the Options Bar. Select the dimension.48 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Move the dimension value as shown.

Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. click Join Geometry. click Family Types. Creating a Window Family | 583 . 56 On the Design Bar. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. you can still see the window. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. 54 In the Project Browser. If necessary.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. under 3D Views. double-click View 1. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. and select the vertical mullions.

Enter 2000 mm for Width. Under Other. Click Apply. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Assigning Materials to the Window Components.57 In the Family Types dialog box. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you assign materials to the frame. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . sash. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click OK. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Width. enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Under Other. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 59 Proceed to the next exercise.

under Elevations. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click Materials. 3 In the New Material dialog box. 6 In the Materials dialog box. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. under AccuRender. and click OK. and click OK. and the mullions. Dark. double-click Exterior. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. No Gloss. the sash. click OK. select Stained. click the Model Graphics Style control. 9 Select the window frame sweep. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 8 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. Creating a Window Family | 585 . click for Texture. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. and select Shading with Edges. sash. Yellow/. 4 In the Materials dialog box. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Pine Frame for Name.

verify that Coarse. 18 On the Design Bar. click for Material. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select Pine Frame for Name. under View Specific Display. 24 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. Medium. and Fine are selected. under 3D Views. and click OK. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. double-click View 1. Medium. under Identity Data. click OK. 16 Under Detail Levels. 20 Select the glass extrusion. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Graphics. and click OK. under View Specific Display. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 21 On the Options Bar. clear the other view options. double-click Right. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . and Fine are selected. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 23 Under Detail Levels. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory.10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Visibility. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). select Edit for Visibility. verify that Coarse. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. mullions. and glass display their assigned materials. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. 26 Proceed to the next exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. Creating a Window Family | 587 . The window frame. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Defining New Window Types. sash.

The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. and click OK. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter 2000 mm for Height. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. and click Apply.

but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. click New.The window height is doubled. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click Apply. 7 In the Name dialog box. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. and click OK. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. Creating a Window Family | 589 . 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. and click OK. enter 1000 mm for Height. 9 Under Family Types. Enter 1250 mm for Height. under Family Types.

Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. 23 On the Design Bar. Notice the detail that displays. and click Open. clear Tag on Placement. 20 In the Open dialog box. 32 On the View menu. 19 On the Options Bar. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 27 In the Type Selector. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. navigate to the location of your Training Window. click Thin Lines. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. click to start a new project based on your default template. Click Apply. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. click Load. click Modify. Training Window. 13 In the Name dialog box. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. Enter 1300 mm for Height. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Wall. 24 On the Options Bar. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. click Save. select it. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width.rfa. click Window. 25 In the Type Selector. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. Click Apply. click New.rfa file. 29 In the Type Selector. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP.11 In the Family Types dialog box. 31 On the Design Bar. click Window. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 15 On the File menu. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h.

This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. and drawers as extrusions. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. You begin by creating the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. Finally. click the Model Graphics Style control. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 .34 On the View toolbar. click . and specify values for the furniture length and depth. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. 35 On the View Control Bar. drawer base. and select Shading with Edges. rolltop. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.

click New ➤ Family. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. Level. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. click Ref Plane. 9 On the Design Bar. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 6 On the Design Bar. 2 On the File menu. and click Open. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. their exact location is not critical. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box.rft. 4 Maximize the view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Select Metric Furniture. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the View menu. Floor Plan: Ref. click Dimension. NOTE When you draw the reference planes.

Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. as shown. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. click Modify. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. proceeding to the centerline reference plane.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . and ending at the right reference plane. 13 Select the left reference plane. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 12 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. and ending at the lower reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. as shown. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. as shown. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

click Modify. click Modify. 19 Select the upper. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown.18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. horizontal reference plane. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. TIP To do this.

25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. 27 On the Options Bar.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .. 24 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. select Family parameter.> for Label. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK... specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter. Click OK. Under Parameter Data..> for Label. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. Select Type. enter Depth for Name. enter Length for Name. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. For Group parameter under.

Click OK. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. 30 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. enter 2000 mm for Length. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. click Family Types. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Therefore. enter 3000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. Click Apply. you can still see the model. Click Apply. 32 In the Family Types dialog box.

11 In the Project Browser. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Your lines may have a lighter weight. 7 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. click Set Work Plane. click . under Specify a new Work Plane. and enter 100 mm for Depth. and click OK. select Level: Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. double-click Front. click Lines. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 10 On the Design Bar. NOTE In the image below. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. and click to select all four symbolic lines. click Symbolic Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. click . click Finish Sketch.

press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. and select the top edge. as shown.. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar.> for Label. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. 22 On the Options Bar. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select <Add parameter.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. click Modify.. and select the bottom edge. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.

and click Apply. select Dimensions. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 750 mm for Height. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. click Family Types.. Click Apply. 27 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. and click Apply.. Click OK. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. 25 On the Options Bar. Click OK. select Family parameter. Select Type. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. enter 4000 mm for Length. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter Height for Name. select <Add parameter. and click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click OK. For Group parameter under. enter Thickness for Name. Under Parameter Data. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. click Modify. For Group parameter under. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 1200 mm for Height.> for Label.

2 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. Click the lock icon as shown. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. click . Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Dimension. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Level. double-click Ref.

click . under Specify a new Work Plane. click Set Work Plane. as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar. Lock the dimension as shown. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. select Level: Ref. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Level for Name. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box.

16 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.After you complete the rectangle. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . two lock icons display.

You can also highlight the entire line chain. 20 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the four sketched lines. . as shown below at the cursor. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . using the TAB key. 23 For the align-to reference. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. click the Mirror tool. click .

24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. A lock icon displays. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

33 On the Options Bar.> for Label. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base.28 Add two final dimensions. select Drawer Base Width for Label. Select Type. 30 On the Options Bar.. For Group parameter under. as shown. click Modify. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Under Parameter Data. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. 34 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions.. Click OK. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. select Family parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter.

double-click Front. a lock icon displays. After the alignment. 37 On the Tools toolbar. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . click it to lock the alignment. under Elevations. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser.35 On the Design Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. click . click Finish Sketch. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base.

and click OK. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. and click Apply. click . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. click Visibility/Graphics. enter 4000 mm for Length. notice that annotations display in this view. click Family Types.40 On the Design Bar. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 47 On the Design Bar. you can still see the model. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. 42 On the View menu. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. Click OK. However. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. 45 On the View Control Bar. Click Apply. 41 On the View toolbar. Enter 750 mm for Height. click the Scale control and select 1:20. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 2000 mm for Length. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. and click Apply. Enter 1200 mm for Height.

4 In the Work Plane dialog box. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the upper left corner. click Lines. double-click Right.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 2 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Elevations. click . 5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . as shown. 3 On the Design Bar.

click . Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. then the lower horizontal sketch line. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. then select the right parallel sketch line. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. 9 Select the desk top. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock it. and lock the alignment.8 On the Tools toolbar. and lock it. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension.

16 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. . click Finish Sketch. the upper sketch line. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines.13 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. click the Fillet arc tool. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 .

select the left edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. click . and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Front.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon.

you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. If not. and click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. click Family Types.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. The desk should adapt to all the changes. you can still see the model. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. click . Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . You can also use dimension constraints. 23 On the Design Bar.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

notice that there is only one view available. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. select Area. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Training Files.rfa. Select Generic Annotation. and click Open. and click OK. select Ceiling Finish. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. The new room tag is now ready for use. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . and click OK. In the left pane of the New dialog box. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.rft. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.

3 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. click Lines. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click . 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. click .Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar.

Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . click Object Styles. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. and select the upper vertical line. 10 On the Design Bar. select 3 for Line Weight. 17 On the Design Bar. click New. and click OK.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. and click OK. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 16 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. in the North Line row. click Modify. enter North Line for Name. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. select North Line. under Modify Subcategories. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box.

you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. select A1 metric. Training North Arrow. Select the DefaultMetric. and click Open. 7 On the File menu.rfa.rfa. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. click Modify.rte file. click New ➤ Project. select Training Files. select Training North Arrow. click Symbol. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 8 In the Open dialog box. In the New Project Dialog box. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Browse. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. click OK. and click Open. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select it. 5 Click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.

and enter -25 for Offset. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . and labels.rft. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. and your project data.The titleblock has linework. click . you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. text. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Titleblock. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. click Lines. 3 On the Options Bar. and click Open. In the left pane of the New dialog box. graphics. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Select A0 metric.

click . and click to draw a new vertical line.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and click . 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. and enter 140 for Offset.

click . and enter 20 for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. click Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. and select the second and third horizontal lines. click Modify. enter 30 for Offset. 17 On the Options Bar. select Title Blocks. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 15 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. press CTRL. 21 On the Options Bar. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet.

640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you add a company logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 2 In the Open dialog box.25 On the Design Bar. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. navigate to Training Files/Common. click Import/Link ➤ Image. The titleblock linework is now complete. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.jpg. text notes. and click Open. select Company Logo. click Modify. and labels to your titleblock.

9 In the Name dialog box. in the text box. and click OK. click Edit/New. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click Text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10mm Bold for Name. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Bold. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . under Text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.4 Zoom in on the logo. enter 10 for Text Size.

Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and drag the text note down as shown. and select the last text note. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. Add consultant name. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. select Text : 8mm. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . address. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and add an address and phone number as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. click Text. 18 Select the drag handle.

select Constrain and Multiple. and select the consultant text note. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 23 On the Edit toolbar.22 On the Design Bar. click . 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. click Modify. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . 24 On the Options Bar.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

select Project Issue Date. and enter Date:. and enter Sheet Number:. 29 On the Options Bar. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 41 On the Options Bar. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. 32 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. click Duplicate. click Label. 34 Click OK twice. select Text : 5mm. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. enter 5mm for Name. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Text. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and enter Drawn By:. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . under Text. and enter Checked By:. click Edit/New. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. enter 5 for Text Size. and click OK. click . 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Checked By and click OK. select Drawn By. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .44 Select the left drag handle on the label.

click Center and Middle. and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. select Project Number. select Sheet Number. click Duplicate. 59 On the Options Bar. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. click . and click OK. under Text.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. click Label. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 53 In the Name dialog box. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. enter 15 for Text Size. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click to specify the label location. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . 50 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 15mm Label for Name.

and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 4mm Label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. click Label. 75 Click OK twice. 73 In the Name dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. click Duplicate.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. under Text. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Client Name. enter 4 for Text Size. 70 On the Options Bar. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. select Project Name. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Edit/New. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. click . and click to specify the label location. and click OK.

rfa file. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. click Left and Middle. and click to specify the label location. select Training Files. and click OK. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click New ➤ Project. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select it. and click Open.rte file. select File Path. and labels are now complete. select 4mm Label. 77 On the Options Bar. click Load. click Browse. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click OK. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . click Modify. The titleblock graphics. 5 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 80 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog box. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. In the New Project Dialog box. text.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. click Sheet.rfa. 7 Click OK.

Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. Enter In Progress for Project Status. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. enter Name for Drawn By. Enter Office Building for Project Name. under Other. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. 14 Click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click Project Information. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify and select the titleblock. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. and click OK.

you create the dome roof with a revolved form. click Project Units. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder.rvt. Next. click Open. on the Settings menu. To change the units of measurement to meters. and set the suffix to None. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. Set the Length units to millimeters. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. Select c_Pantheon. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. and double-click South. set the Area to Square meters. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Orient ➤ Southeast.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. expand Views (all). and click Open. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu.

click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. The center wall section view is displayed. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 7 On the Design Bar.Center. select Roofs for Family Category. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. click Create. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. select Pick a Plane. and click OK. select Section: Wall Section . 10 In the Go To View dialog box. enter Dome for Name. and click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Open View.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. click . 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Set Work Plane.

until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. 17 Move the cursor out. 15 On the Options Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 653 . click Lines. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. click .

and select Chain. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. click . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 On the Options Bar.

Creating In-Place Families | 655 . The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. click .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. select Delete Inner Segment. 27 On the Options Bar.

click and select Chain. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 32 On the Options Bar. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. click Lines.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

select Concrete . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click . 35 Select the interior face of the wall. click OK. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. and click OK. 42 On the View toolbar. under Materials and Finishes. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. click Finish Sketch.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click . 38 In the Materials dialog box. 41 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . click for Material. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Revolution Properties.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 40 On the Design Bar.

and click Open View. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. select Pick a Plane. click . and click OK. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. select Floors for Family Category. click Create. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. double-click South. and click OK. click Axis. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 6 On the Design Bar. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. enter Concave Floor for Name.Center. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 3 In the Name dialog box.

for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Creating In-Place Families | 659 . Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Footing level line and the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and select Chain.O. click . 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 14 On the Options Bar.

Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click OK. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Cobblestone for Name. click Finish Sketch.O. 24 On the Design Bar. double-click 3D Section View. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. click Revolution Properties.18 Specify the intersection of the T. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box.O. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. click for Material. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. and click OK. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click Finish Family. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile.

and detail level controls. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. The truss also has multiple types. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. methodology. At the end of this tutorial. During this tutorial. 661 . the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. not specifically how to make a floor truss. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. you will understand the process. In this case. formula-based parameters. assigned subcatecories. In exercises that become increasingly complex.

In this lesson. and also works intuitively with them. this must be a structural beam component. you should avoid over-designing the component. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. Although this solution is possible. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. It should also be an available option within a beam system. it is not the best solution. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. beams. Take this into consideration during your design planning. For training purposes. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. In the next exercise. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. and structural walls. In addition. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. NOTE When creating a new family. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. For every complexity added to a family. Two types should be created.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. a generic floor-based component might work. you determine the requirements of the new component. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . In this case. In this case. it is an open-joist wood floor truss.

such as wood type. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. would require Instance or Type parameters. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. 4 Continue with the next exercise. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. Depending on the family you are designing. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. In addition. Selecting the Family Template. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. What types are most commonly used? In this training case.

and notice the preview. For training purposes. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. navigate to it. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). There are two structural framing templates provided. 3 In the New dialog box. notice the preview. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. scroll through the various template options.rft. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). ■ Metric Structural Framing . Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. do not open this template.Complex and Trusses. Because of its simplicity. Like most generic family templates. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rft and notice the preview. 5 In the New dialog box. 4 In the New dialog box. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. ■ Metric Structural Framing . In addition.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.Beams and Braces.rft. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. select Metric Generic Model floor based. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. On the right side of the New dialog box. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . scroll to the structural framing templates. If you are not in this folder.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. and display functions required by structural beams. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. for example: wall based or floor based. spacing. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. Select it so that the preview displays. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. This template is the best starting point for the new family.Complex and Trusses.

Like many templates. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. Creating the Component Skeleton. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Level In this view. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. however. 11 In the Project Browser. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family.Beams and Braces. 12 In the Project Browser. Floor Plan: Ref. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. Level. lines. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. 10 Maximize the view.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . Therefore. double-click Front. double-click View 1. click the Training Files icon. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Floor Plan: Ref. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. under Elevations. you add the reference planes. under 3D Views.

Level. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. In the project plan view image below. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. notice the location of the beam extents. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. double-click Ref. Reference Plane: Left. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. you add reference planes to the beam design. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. In the image below. under Floor Plans. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise.

■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. click . it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. click Ref Plane. Before adding new reference planes. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. In a later exercise.

click on the Edit toolbar.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). and select the Level: Ref. under Elevations. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. double-click Front. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. Level. To do this. 10 On the Design Bar. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Add ref. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Level as the mirror axis.

This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. click to place it as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click . 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click to place it. click Ref Plane. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . click to place it as shown. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 14 On the Options Bar.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam.

and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. under Floor Plans. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 19 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. which you do in the next exercise. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. specify an Offset of 238 mm. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. Level. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). click to place it as shown. Before you move on to the next exercise.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. double-click Ref. 22 On the Options Bar. specify an Offset of 200 mm.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset. click Dimension.rfa. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. After adding the dimension. Make sure you remember where you saved it. and click Save. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 28 In the Save As dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. navigate to the folder of your choice. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.25 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. click Modify. Wood Floor Truss. click .

and the lower horizontal reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. the Center reference plane. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 6 On the Design Bar. place the dimension to the left as shown. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. click Dimension. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Front. under Elevations. Level. Place the dimension as shown.4 On the Design Bar. click Dimension.

add two dimensions as shown. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model.11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 . These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. and place it below the dimension you added previously. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model.

you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters.rfa. When you design a new family. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. In addition. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. Throughout the tutorial. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. under Floor Plans. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. consider making it a type parameter. Level. Creating New Length Parameters. In this exercise. In the next exercise. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you will add additional reference planes. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Wood Floor Truss. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. dimensions. consider making it a type parameter. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. and constraints as needed. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. double-click Ref. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. If the component has material that varies per component.15 Add four dimensions as shown. it becomes a parameter. consider making it an instance parameter.

Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. Select Type. double-click Front. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Add parameter for Label. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. under Elevations. Under Parameter Data.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. 7 On the Options Bar. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Click OK. enter Chord Width for Name. Click OK. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter.

Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. select Family parameter. enter Chord Thickness for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Under Parameter Data. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Options Bar.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. Select Type. select Add parameter for Label. enter Center Chase Width for Name. select Add parameter for Label.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar. select Chord Thickness for Label. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 .

you can drag it to the opposing corner. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding or modifying a parameter. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. 19 Click Cancel. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. click Save.rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. When you open the Family Types dialog box. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Flexing the Component Model. 20 On the File menu. When you flex a family. Nesting a component.18 On the Design Bar. Adding a new constraint. In the Family Types dialog box. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Wood Floor Truss. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. Dimensions. When you open the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. This is not limited to length parameters. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. In this exercise. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. If you add a new material parameter. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. After you verify this. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you load this family into a project. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you change a parameter value and apply the change.

Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. click Family Types. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. and click Apply. under Dimensions.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. 2 On the Design Bar. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. In addition. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . enter 600 mm for Depth. Level. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. and click Apply.

After flexing the design. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. 6 On the File menu. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss.rfa. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. click Save. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. you align and lock their position. Click OK. After adding the chords. under Elevations. When working within the Family Editor. After creating the extrusions. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Adding Solid Geometry. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. double-click Left. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Click Apply.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Wood Floor Truss.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. click Lines.3 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. When using the Trim tool. click . NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. the lines will no longer overlap. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . and select Lock. and click OK. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Left. click Name. and verify that Lock is selected. click . click .

Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line.rfa. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 Select the chord extrusions. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. Wood Floor Truss. 16 In the Project Browser. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. under Elevations. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. double-click View 1. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 15 On the Design Bar. click . Dataset Continue to use the dataset. under 3D Views. 2 Enter SD. click Finish Sketch. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 17 On the File menu. double-click Front. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. and click OK. Therefore. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. as shown. and click Apply. click Family Types. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. On the Design Bar. click Dimension. click Apply. enter 3000 for Length. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. enter 6000 for Length. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. as shown. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. 8 In the Family Types dialog box.

This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. you add the web members. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. depth. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. Later in this lesson. In a later exercise. Therefore. Flex the chord width. In this particular case. double-click View 1. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. enter 6000 for Length. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. 14 Click OK. click Family Types. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. under 3D Views. use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards.

Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 20 On the File menu. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When flexing. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Therefore. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise.rfa. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. click Family Types. click Save. such as doubling. 17 On the Design Bar. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Click Apply. try picking a method. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. Wood Floor Truss. that allows you to easily return to the original values. and click OK.

You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. click . 5 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. 10 On the Design Bar. click . 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. click Lines. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar. the lines will no longer overlap. click the Hide/Isolate control. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. Level. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . vertical member of the center chase as shown. click Lines. click . and verify that Lock is selected. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. and click Hide Object. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click .Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. 11 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. double-click Ref. 3 On the View Control Bar.

click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. double-click Front. click Align. 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Zoom in on the center chase. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. and lock the alignment as shown. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu.15 On the Design Bar. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. click Finish Sketch. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. and after the alignment. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . 19 For the align-to reference. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. under Elevations.

click Family Types. and click OK. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. Click Apply. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .22 On the Design Bar. select Add Parameter for Label. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. If it does not. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. click Modify. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Trimmable End Length for Label. 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Parameter Data. enter19mm for Offset. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. select the upper horizontal reference plane. click . 41 On the upper chord. 40 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 32 On the Options Bar.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. double-click Right. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 39 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. click Lines. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. 33 On the Design Bar. Click OK. and verify that Lock is selected. click Family Types. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. click Apply. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . under Dimensions. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. Select Instance. on the lower chord. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Elevations.

55 On the upper chord. on the lower chord. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. 54 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and verify that Lock is selected. enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. click . 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 50 Zoom around the truss elements. and click OK. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. select the upper horizontal reference plane. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 48 On the Design Bar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. click . under Constraints. double-click Left. 53 On the Design Bar. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 46 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar. under Elevations. 51 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. 56 On the Options Bar.

click Align. under Elevations. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. 65 On the Tools menu.58 On the Tools toolbar. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 62 On the Design Bar. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 60 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Extrusion Properties. and click OK. under Constraints. double-click Front.

73 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When you finish the alignments. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. and click OK. Click Apply. if you select the end extrusion. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. under 3D Views. 75 In the Project Browser. The truss should adapt to all the changes. click Family Types.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. this is the align-to point. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. double-click View 1. Make adjustments to account for the right side. 71 On the Design Bar. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. Click Apply. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . fix any problematic alignments and constraints. click Modify. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. If it does not.

you can continue using it in the next lesson. a sill. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment.76 Save the Family. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Testing the Family in a Project. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. NOTE Close any open families or projects. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. and a rim joist. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. click Open. Although you could continue using the previous family. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. click the Training Files icon. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. After you load it into the project.

you add several instances of the truss family to the project. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. click Load into Projects. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Structural Framing. click Open. Open the m_WWF1. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. 2 On the Design Bar. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you had multiple projects or families open. Notice that the project file is now active.rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand Families.rfa. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

expand Views.Southeast Isometric. The rim joist was added as a beam.Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. click Beam. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. 2 In the Project Browser. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another.Southeast Isometric. double-click 3D . therefore. under Floor Plans. This project consists of foundation walls. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. expand 3D Views. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. a slab. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . and double-click 3D . a wood sill. 6 In the Project Browser. and a wood rim joist. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. under 3D Views.

7 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. not the wall or rim joist. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. 9 In the Project Browser. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You do not need to be precise. double-click 3D .

16 Proceed to the next lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. 11 On the File menu. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. click Yes. click Edit Family. click Save as. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. In the next lesson. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Working with Nested Subcomponents. Because the family is already open. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. 12 In the Save as dialog box. click Undo Drag. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. This should return the project to its original dimension. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. 10 On the Edit menu.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. you nest wood web members into the floor truss.

verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. 2 In the Project Browser. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. 5 On the File menu. click Component. double-click Ref.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. click Hide/Isolate. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 7 In the Type Selector. This will make aligning the wood web easier. under Floor Plans.rfa is the active file. Open the m_Wood_Web. This family is a single extrusion as shown. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Level. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. and click Hide Object. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise.

In the following steps. under Elevations. click Modify. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. 10 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. You will align the left web component first. Do not select it. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. 13 For the align-to point. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. double-click Front. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 .9 On the Design Bar.

NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. In addition. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 19 On the Tools menu. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. click Modify. click Ref Plane. In the steps that follow. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. click Align.

Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. click Dimension. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Place the dimension as shown.

When you refer to another parameter within a formula. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. length. click Modify. click Save As. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. 12 On the Design Bar. Select Type. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. or the width of the center chase. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. select WebDepth. click OK. under Other. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. and click Properties. you label these dimensions. Select Length for Type. Select Common for Discipline. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. you add new parameters to control the web components. under Constraints.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 26 On the Design Bar. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive.In the next exercise. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Parameter Data. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. click Family Types. under Parameters. click Add. 5 Click OK. Click OK. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Modify. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. In the Type Parameter dialog box. 28 In the Save As dialog box. enter Depth . You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 27 On the File menu. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters.

Select Length for Type. under Parameters. Select Instance. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. under Parameters. 16 Under Other. under Parameters. Select Common for Discipline. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. After you enter the formula. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Add. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. click Add. Select Length for Type. under Parameter Data. This parameter is primarily for convenience. Select Constraints for Group parameter under.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Instance. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . enter (Length .(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Common for Discipline. click Add. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. Click OK. which must remain at least 150mm long. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. 19 Under Constraints. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK.

select Add parameter for Label. Select Common for Discipline. under Parameter Data. 31 Under Constraints. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. 32 Click OK.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. 22 Under Constraints. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 25 On the Options Bar. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. 28 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 23 Click OK. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. Click OK. Select Instance. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. select Webhalflength for Label. Select Integer for Type. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. click Family Types. under Parameter Data.

it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. and click Properties. under 3D Views. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. 42 On the Design Bar. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 40 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog box. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. click Modify. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Family Types. Because you have added and constrained new components. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. If it does not. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . double-click View 1. click OK. 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. select WebArrayLength. 39 On the Design Bar. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. click Edit/New. click OK. Click Apply. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

45 On the File menu. 4 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. When picking the corner. click Array. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Save. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. you specify the move start point. Select Constrain. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. you array the nested web components. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First. Enter 3 for Number. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. 3 On the Edit menu. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. Click Apply.44 In the Family Types dialog box. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. then you specify the move end point. double-click Front. add alignment constraints. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. Select 2nd for Move to.

8 On the Design Bar. When picking the corner. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 19 In the left array. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. then select the line twice. Enter 3 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. When picking the corner. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. click Modify. Select Constrain. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 18 On the Tools menu. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 15 On the Design Bar.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. click Array. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. click Modify. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . Select 2nd for Move to. When picking the corner. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. click Align. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. click Modify. NOTE This step is very important. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 22 Within the right array.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. select WebArrayNum for Label. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . If you do not lock the edges of the array. 28 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. align and lock the two right web components. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. select WebArrayNum for Label. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. 21 Within the left array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right.

Member Left. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. and lock the alignment as shown. This is because earlier in the tutorial. 34 On the Tools menu. 36 Select the reference plane. 35 Select the reference plane. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. as the align-to point. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. Left. click Align. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . 33 Delete the dimension.

710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and prepare the view for flexing. double-click View 1. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. Therefore. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.NOTE With most beam families. however. in this case. under 3D Views. Click Apply. 46 On the Design Bar. this solution has little. The truss should adapt to all the changes. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. click Family Types. 37 On the Design Bar. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. if any. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. 44 Click Apply. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 12000mm for Length. click Modify. under Dimensions. significant impact. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. If it does not. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right.

should be open. Enter 6000mm for Length. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. In addition to the truss family. Reload the truss into the project. for training and time purposes. click Save. these steps have been reduced. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. Reloading a Family into a Project. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. 2 On the Design Bar. you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. 49 On the File menu. select Override parameter values of existing types. displays. View 1. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View.rvt. and click Yes. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. the project. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. m_WWF1.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . and click OK. however. Click Apply. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss.

6 In the Project Browser. Materials. and Parameters. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. and Parameters In this lesson. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. you create and apply subcategories and materials. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. In the next lesson. Applying Subcategories. 7 On the Edit menu. Applying Subcategories. double-click Level 1. Materials. click Undo Drag. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 9 Proceed to the next lesson.4 In the Project Browser. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. under Floor Plans.Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views. double-click 3D .

Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. In this dataset. Materials. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. In addition. Within the family.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. click Open. Open the m_WWF2. the material values were set to By Category by default. and Parameters | 713 . you create new subcategories within the truss family. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. click the Training Files icon. Applying Subcategories.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. Notice no material has been applied to the truss.

under Modify Subcategories.Timber for Name. 12 On the Settings menu. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. you have more control over component visibility within a project. click Edit Family. and click OK. If there was a metal beam in this building model. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. click Object Styles. 6 In the Materials dialog box. click Object Styles. In addition. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. click Wood . and click OK. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 8 On the Edit menu. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. Notice the Wood . 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Undo Object Styles. it would also have the wood material applied to it. click New. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor.2 On the Settings menu. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. click OK. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. and expand the category Structural Framing. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

click . 16 In the Materials dialog box. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. under Identity Data. under AccuRender. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify. click OK. click .Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. select Other. select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. click . 23 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Check None. click Edit Family. and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss. and Parameters | 715 . Yellow. The web component family opens in a 3D view. and click OK. Materials. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. and click OK. select Natural. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 29 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. 17 In the New Material dialog box. click Duplicate. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. Applying Subcategories. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 24 In the Filter dialog box.No Gloss for Name. 20 In the Materials dialog box. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. click OK. 25 On the Options Bar.

select m_WWF2.31 On the Settings menu. enter Wood Floor Truss .Webs subcategory. 42 On the Options Bar. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. 39 In the Materials dialog box.Webs for Name. and click OK.rfa. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. Yellow. click New.rvt. 37 In the Materials dialog box.Webs. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click OK. select Wood Floor Truss . click OK. under Modify Subcategories. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. under AccuRender. select Override parameter values of existing types. click . click Load into Projects. click OK.No Gloss for Name. click Load into Projects. and click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. click . 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Object Styles. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. 36 In the New Material dialog box. and click Yes. 35 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. 41 Select the web extrusion. and click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss . click Duplicate. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine.Webs for Subcategory. select Natural. and click OK. under Identity Data. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.

Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. under Categories. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. select Override parameter values of existing types. 56 On the File menu. expand Structural Framing. 2 On the Options Bar. 52 Click OK. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. click Edit Family. 53 On the View menu. the stick symbols continue to display. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. 55 On the Edit menu. 50 On the Settings menu. and Parameters | 717 . click Object Styles. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. expand Structural Framing. and click Yes. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. click Visibility/Graphics. however. Creating Material Parameters.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 57 In the Save as dialog box. Applying Subcategories. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. under Visibility. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Materials. click Save As.

rvt. click OK.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Metal . Select Instance. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. select Floor Truss Material. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. under Parameter Data. 11 In the Filter dialog box. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). select m_WWF2. Select Material for Type. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. When reloaded into a project. 21 Click OK twice. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. under Materials and Finishes. notice the default material is By Category. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 8 Click OK. under Other. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK. and click OK. 27 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select the component. and click OK. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. Select Common for Discipline. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. do not assign a material to the parameter. click the button to the right of the Material value field. click . Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. and click OK. click Load into Projects. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. select Override parameter values of existing types. 22 On the Design Bar. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. click . click Add. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box.Steel for Name. and click Yes. under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click OK. click Modify. click Family Types. under Parameters. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. and click OK. click Check None. Click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. select Floor Truss Material. In this case. 10 On the Options Bar. press TAB.

In the next lesson. click Open. and click Coarse.31 On the Design Bar. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. click Save. click Modify. click Detail Level. click the Training Files icon. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. click Close. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Open the m_WWF3. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. 32 On the File menu. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Controlling Component Visibility. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. all elements display at all times in all views. However. Currently within the truss. 33 On the File menu. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. a new dataset is supplied.

Clear Left/Right. Click OK. clear Coarse. select Override parameter values of existing types. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 8 Select the web extrusion. Click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Visibility. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. Clear Left/Right. click Visibility. click Edit Family. 18 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Plan/RCP. and click OK. and click Yes. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Visibility. clear Coarse. Under Detail Levels. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 6 On the Options Bar. click Load into Projects. 11 On the Design Bar. Click OK. clear Plan/RCP. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Under Detail Levels. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display.2 Select a floor truss. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 3 On the Options Bar. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. click Edit Family.rfa. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. 9 On the Options Bar. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. clear Plan/RCP. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

Click OK. click Detail Level. double-click Level 1. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click Medium. click Visibility. 26 On the View Control Bar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. clear Coarse. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.rvt. and click Yes. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. and click OK. under Floor Plans. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar. and click Coarse. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . 28 On the View Control Bar. 27 In the Project Browser. select m_WWF3. click Detail Level.

30 In the Save As dialog box. The truss returns to its original designed value. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. Creating Component Types In this lesson. click New. and click OK. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. enter 64mm for Chord Width. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 6 In the New dialog box. under Dimensions. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE When creating new components. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 11 Click OK. and click Apply. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. enter 89x38 for Name. Notice the chord changes width. click Save As. click Family Types. click Edit Family. 8 In the New dialog box. click New. enter 64x38 for Name.29 On the File menu. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. and click Apply. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. under Family Types. In the final exercise. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating Component Types. under Family Types. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project.

Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. select 64x38. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. enter 8000 for length. if(Length < 7500. Notice the truss depth increases. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 286. under Dimensions. and click Yes. and click OK. Creating Conditional Formulas. select m_WWF3. click Family Types. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click Apply. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. click Beam. click Edit Family. click Modify.Southeast Isometric. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. click Apply. 350.rvt. Creating Component Types | 723 . <result-if-true>. 16 In the Type Selector. 20 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. if(Length < 9000. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. click Load into Projects. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. select Override parameter values of existing types. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. 400))) 6 Click Apply. and click OK. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Notice the two beam types. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. enter 6000 for length. double-click 3D . click Save. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 2 On the Options Bar.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 22 On the File menu. 21 In the Project Browser. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 400. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. select 89x38.

Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. double-click 3D . you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. click Load into Projects. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Floor Plans. 16 On the File menu.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. 17 Close any open files. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. click Save. 14 In the Project Browser. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families.rvt. You have completed this tutorial. select Override parameter values of existing types. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box.Southeast Isometric. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. and click Yes. select m_WWF3.

Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. 725 . You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.

View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. under Length. click Open. For Unit Suffix. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Click OK. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Open the c_Area. select Square meters. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . right-click in the Design Bar. select 2 decimal places.rvt file located in the Common folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click Area Settings. If you are using metric units. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. In the Area Settings dialog box. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. 3 Under Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click Project Units. select m2 Click OK. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. it is not necessary in this exercise. select mm. In the final exercise. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. expand Views (all). For Unit Suffix. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. expand Floor Plans. click OK. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. click the Training Files icon. select Millimeters. your values will be different. These schemes define spatial relationships. For Rounding. and click Area Analysis.

14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. or 0. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. ■ 8 Click Cancel. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. forming a closed loop.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. the system-computed height defaults to the level. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 12 In the Project Browser. you must manually add these boundary lines. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. click Area Tag. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. click the Room Calculations tab. When you select Yes in this dialog box. Click OK. If you select No. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. click Area Plan. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. under Views (all).

Next. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). click Area Boundary. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. and store area. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area Plan. Click OK.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. common areas. you create a new area plan for rentable space. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable).

click Area Tag. click . 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. you can either draw them or pick them. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag.20 On the Options Bar. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. If you do not select this option. When you add area boundary lines. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. 26 On the Options Bar. click Modify. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. 22 On the Design Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . When you pick the walls.

33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the tag. 28 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 31 On the Options Bar. Click OK. click Area Tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . Select Office area for Area Type. 30 On the Design Bar. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Click OK. Click OK. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

34 Add an area tag to the building model core. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. enter Core for Name. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Notice that within the two store areas. and select Store Area for Area Type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 .

click Color Fill. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory.rvt.36 On the File menu. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. and when the color legend displays. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. click Save. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. In the next exercise. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. and click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. In this exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. name the project Area-in progress. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click to place it.

click the Fields tab. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.3 When the dialog box displays. under Category. 7 Under Available fields. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .

After you make building elements. 735 . and roofs. In this tutorial. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. curtain systems. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. At any time. you can specify the view to display massing elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. or both. building elements. If you modify a massing face. you then need to update the building face. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. floors.

and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click Massing. on the Options Bar. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click the Training Files icon. roofs. under Views (all). Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. floor.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. click Open. click Create Mass. You assign the default wall. under Floor Plans. and cutting geometry. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Lines. and floors. Open the m_Massing_Start. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. sweeps. the building model uses those element types to define the walls.

under Materials and Finishes. and then click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. 12 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. click Extrusion Properties. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 14 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools | 737 . click Extrusion Properties. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. and click 16 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Materials dialog box. under Constraints. 21 In the Materials dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. under Views (all). Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. and click OK. under Constraints. 19 On the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. click the Value for Material. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. on the Options Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . select Mass (Transparent) for Name. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. and then click . click Lines. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor.

select Pick a plane. click Lines. press TAB to highlight the entire face. double-click {3D} to see the results. 26 On the Design Bar. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. TIP If necessary.24 In the Project Browser. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. 29 Click to select the face. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click on the Options Bar. 28 In the drawing area. and click OK. highlight the larger form. under Views (all). 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click West. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown.

click . click . 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line.32 On the Options Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 39 On the Edit toolbar. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 35 On the Options Bar. TIP If you do not see this option. and delete the vertical construction line. Using Massing Tools | 739 . click Modify. 37 On the Design Bar. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click . Next. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. and click to select the line start point. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu.

43 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 51 On the View toolbar. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. on the Options Bar. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . . and click OK. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. under Views (all). 44 On the Design Bar. click Blend Properties. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. double-click East. click . click Edit Top. . 46 On the Options Bar. 48 On the Design Bar.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. click 47 Create an arc as shown. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Ref Plane. 2 In the drawing area. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 7 Using the same technique.52 Proceed to the next exercise. Using Massing Tools | 741 . under Views (all). and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. under Floor Plans. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. select the mass. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click and enter 15000 for Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created.rvt. 4 On the Options bar. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. double-click Level 1. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. m_Massing_Start. as shown.

13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Lines and. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. click and select Chain. 15 Click OK. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. under Materials and Finishes. on the View Control Bar. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. snap the corners to the intersections. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. When sketching each extrusion. 19 On the File menu. In this exercise. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Mass. click Save As. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. and then click Hidden Line.rvt. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. on the Options Bar. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . 16 On the Design Bar. and 0 for Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Extrusion Properties. 14 Under Constraints.

enter 15000 mm for Width. click Family Types. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 11000 mm for Height. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. click New. click Save As. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Finally. 9 Click OK. and 18000 mm for Depth. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. under Other. and 9000 mm for Depth. you create new family types from a mass family file. and click OK. and click OK. and 6000 mm for Depth. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. In this exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. 18000 mm for Height. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. and click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog box. 10 On the File menu. and click OK. and click Apply. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click Apply.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. click Open.rfa. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . You place several instances of the mass families into the project.rfa. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 12000 mm for Height. Open Box.

Open the m_Massing_In-place. 1 If not already selected. click the Training Files icon. Arc Dome. 2 In the Project Browser. and Triangle. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 On the View Control Bar. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Semi Barrel Vault. click Open. 4 On the File menu. You also load other existing mass families and place them. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. under Views (all). under Floor Plans.rvt file located in the Metric folder. double-click Site. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa family files.rfa.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise.rfa. click Place Mass. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 Open the Box-Training. 9 In the Type Selector.

17 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 21 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Modify. 18 Press CTRL. and click . click Place Mass. 15 In the Type Selector. and click . 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. click Modify. 25 On the Design Bar.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. select the 3 boxes. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 26 In the drawing area. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 12 Select the box. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 22 On the Options Bar. enter 90 for Angle. select the triangle. click Place Mass. and click to place the mass. and click OK twice. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar.

you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. and click OK twice. and click OK twice. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. click Place Mass. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter.27 Select the triangle. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. In this exercise. 32 Select the box and click . You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 35 On the View menu. 30 In the Type Selector. 34 On the View toolbar. click . you join these mass elements. and click .

the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element.rvt file. click . Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. 4 Select the triangle. and then press ESC to see the result. . 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise.

enter SM. double-click Site. click 8 On the Options Bar. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. under Floor Plans. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . click for Axis. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. under Views (all). 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. on the Edit toolbar. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser.

15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. click . 17 Press ESC to see the result.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and then select the triangle. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. . click 14 On the Tools toolbar. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. In this exercise. you joined mass elements together.

You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and select the triangle mass element. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click Modify. double-click Site. enter 90 degrees for Angle.rvt. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. and then click OK. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 7 In the Type Selector. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Sloped (primary). 2 On the Window menu. under Views (all). select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. 8 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Project Browser. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Place Mass. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. select Rotate after placement. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. clear Curved. click . 1 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass.

under Views (all). and click Wireframe. 24 On the View Control Bar. click Modify.13 On the Design Bar. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. under Elevations. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 23 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. and click . 14 In the drawing area. and click OK twice. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . click . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. select the three arc domes. click Place Mass. and click . and click OK twice. 16 On the View Control Bar. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. and click Wireframe. double-click North.

You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click . you placed mass elements into Design Options. and click OK. under Option. clear Sloped. double-click {3D}. 33 On the Design Options toolbar.rvt. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 32 Click the value for Design Option. and click OK. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. 29 In the Project Browser. 27 On the Design Options toolbar.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. click . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. select Curved and. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 36 On the File menu. under Views (all). click Make Primary. 30 On the View menu. click the Design Options tab. you can make it the primary option. In this exercise. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. select Curved. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics.

1 In the Project Browser. you pick massing faces to create walls.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. double-click {3D}. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click to show the massing model. click Wall by Face. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. under Views (all). and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.Brick on CMU. select Basic Wall: Exterior .Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click . 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 2 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Type Selector. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the View menu. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 6 On the Options Bar.

click Wall by Face. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. Click Wall by Face. 14 In the Project Browser. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 12 On the Design Bar. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Type Selector. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown.8 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. double-click Level 3. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all).

click Wall by Face. click . If desired. 19 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . double-click Level 9. 20 On the View Control Bar. and click Wireframe. you pick massing faces to create floors. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

Curtain Systems. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. double-click {3D}. 2 On the View menu. click Floor Area Faces. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. 4 Click OK.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 In the Project Browser. and Walls. and click OK.rvt. clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all). 6 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Model Categories tab.

10 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 9 Press CTRL. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. and click OK.8 On the View menu. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. select Levels 1-4. clear Exclude Options. 12 On the Options Bar. click Orient ➤ Northeast. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 .

17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 16 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Floor Area Faces. click Create Floors.13 Press CTRL. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 22 In the Project Browser. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Floor by Face. under Views (all). 21 On the View toolbar. click . under Floor Plans. 20 On the Options Bar. double-click Mass Schedule.

double-click {3D}. click Roof by Face. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 .rvt. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. under Views (all).In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.

and then click OK. click Create Roof. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. and Walls. 11 On the View menu. select Curtain Panels. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 5 On the Options Bar. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof.400mm. Curtain Systems. click Create Roof. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Visibility/Graphics. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. select Basic Roof : Generic . 9 On the Options Bar.4 In the Type Selector. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.

double-click {3D}. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Curtain System by Face.rvt. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Press CTRL.In this exercise.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.6 On the Options Bar. click Create System. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing .

8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. click Create System. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 9 On the Options Bar. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . In this exercise. select the blended form on the in-place mass. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.

764 | Chapter 22 Massing . Curtain Systems. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. clear Curtain Panels.rvt. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Roofs. click Edit/New. click Visibility/Graphics. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Model Categories tab. under Views (all). and then click OK. Next. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and Walls. Floors. 2 On the View menu. click Duplicate. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.

click Modify. clear Exclude Options.10 On the Design Bar. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 . 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 On the Options Bar.

double-click Level 1. click OK. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. click .The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all). 19 On the View toolbar. Also. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Project Browser. TIP To select the curtain wall. 17 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Remake. you want to select the smaller one.

TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. click Remake. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof as shown. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.

Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. In this exercise. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. you changed the size of an existing mass family.22 Select the arc dome curtain system.rvt. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. and click Remake.

If desired. right-click on the 3D view. 3 In the Project Browser. You might create the model shown. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 6 On the Model Categories tab.Massing only. 4 Rename the view 3D . and click Duplicate. 8 Click None to clear the selection. click Visibility/Graphics. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. 9 Select Mass. 5 On the View menu. In this exercise. to the building shell.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. This concludes the massing tutorial. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 7 Clear one of the check boxes. and click OK. click All to select all categories.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

771 .Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The scale of this view is 1 : 100.Using Site Tools In this lesson. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. In the second part of this exercise. expand Views (all). convert the data to a table. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. In the final exercises. click Point. and click Site. click Open. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Using the first method. click the Training Files icon. 4 On the Options Bar. and walkways. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. islands. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and then modify the data. click Toposurface. you create a toposurface using two different methods. This project file was created using the default metric template. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. You add property lines manually. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. and double-click Site. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . you add a building pad to the site. Open the m_First_Project. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Design Bar. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project.

TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Using Site Tools | 773 . A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. 8 On the Options Bar.

15 On the View Control Bar. under Additional Contours. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. click . and click OK. enter 1500 mm. click Finish Surface. click Site Settings. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 12 On the Settings menu.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 11 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12000 mm. under Increment. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 14 On the View toolbar. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 15000 mm.

16 On the View toolbar. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. click Yes. Before importing the contour data. Using Site Tools | 775 . DGN. rename the level Basement. and press ENTER. modify the level names and elevations. under Floor Plans. it is considered an import symbol. click the elevation value. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. select Preserve colors. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. on the Standard toolbar. 29 Select the imported topography. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. enter 1000 mm. and click OK. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. SAT. 28 On the Design Bar. Until it is exploded. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. and press ENTER. 21 Click the Level 2 text. under Views (all). 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. Under Import or Link. 25 On the File menu. 18 In the Project Browser. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. double-click Site. under Views (all). 23 Click the Level 1 text. click to delete it. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Under Layer/Level Colors. click the Training Files icon. DXF. Click Open.

31 On the Design Bar. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . and then click OK. click Pin Position. and click OK.30 On the Edit menu. when the edges highlight. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. select it. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. clear C_INDX. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 34 Under Visibility. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Toposurface. click Visibility/Graphics. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click the Annotations Categories tab. 36 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. click Modify. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear Elevations. When you select the import symbol.

42 On the View toolbar. this project file is required in its current state. Using Site Tools | 777 . Using the second method. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click . name the project Site-in progress. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. you add property lines using two methods. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Using the first method.rvt. 45 Proceed to the next exercise.39 On the Design Bar. Adding Property Lines. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click Save. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Surface. 43 On the File menu. 40 On the View toolbar. click Save As. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image.

5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. double-click Site. click Lines.rvt. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. do so before continuing. If you have not completed the previous exercise.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. under Floor Plans. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. add an arc line on the right. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. select Create property lines by sketching. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. click Property Line. and click OK. Using the 3-point Arc tool. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click Modify. click Finish Sketch. On the Design Bar. Site-in progress. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Lines. Select and delete the right vertical line.

when they highlight. click OK. select the lines. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click Property Line. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 8 On the Options Bar. to delete them. on the Standard toolbar. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . click 12 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. 9 In the warning dialog box. and click OK. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. A warning dialog box is displayed. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box. select Edit Table. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click OK. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. 15 Starting in Row #1.

review your data entry and make necessary corrections. If the gap is not closed. click the Imported Categories tab.Notice that after you complete the last line. and open the folder. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. click to place the property lines. 24 On the View menu. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click Tag. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 19 In the Tags dialog box. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 20 Click Load. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. and click OK. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. 16 Click OK. This means there is no gap in the property lines.rfa and click Open. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 26 Under Visibility. and click Drafting. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 31 On the View Control Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. click to place it. click Visibility/Graphics. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading with Edges.dwg and click OK. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 23 In the Tags dialog box. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. right-click in the Design Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Training Files. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. clear Leader. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . The tags display more prominently in this view. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Object Styles. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In the Object Styles dialog box. enter the name Working Contour. this project file is required in its current state. click Save. In this exercise. In the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 781 . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. and click OK. click New. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. In the final step. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box.32 On the File menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. Site-in progress. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. 2 On the Settings menu. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. you created two sets of property lines. and click Wireframe.

select Working Contour. 7 Click OK. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. Creating Topographic Subregions. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Dash dot. select a shade of Brown. Under Line Color. Under Line Pattern. 12 On the File menu. select Single Value. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . The object style subcategory. The next exercise requires a new dataset. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. click Close.0 mm. 10 Under Additional Contours. under Contour Line Display. Working Contour. Under Subcategory. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. 11 Click OK. Under Range Type.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. enter 1000. click Site Settings.

2 On the Design Bar. parking areas. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. NOTE In the Metric dataset. Open the m_Site. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. parking areas. click Lines. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click Subregion. try to replicate the location and proportion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Although the exact dimensions are not important. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Using Site Tools | 783 . click the Training Files icon. and islands. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.In the next exercise. such as material. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.

Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each.Tarmacadam.Tarmacadam for Name. click Shading with Edges. click the Value for Material. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. 6 In the Materials dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. enter Parking for Name. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. select Site . expand Schedules/Quantities. 8 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click Properties. 9 On the View menu. and click OK. under Identity Data. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. and double-click Topography Schedule.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography.

you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. click Model Graphics Style. under Floor Plans. In this training project. click Subregion. under Floor Plans. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 18 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. 21 On the Design Bar. Using Site Tools | 785 . Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. Within each subregion. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. they display within this schedule. 12 On the View Control Bar. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. Delete overlapping lines. As you create new subregions. 16 On the Design Bar. click Lines. click Edit Boundary. double-click Site. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. 22 In the upper-right parking area. 14 On the Options Bar. Notice that the project area has increased. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. under Schedules/Quantities. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 20 On the Design Bar. and click Hidden Line. double-click Topography Schedule.

and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. and click OK. 25 In the Materials dialog box. enter Island . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans.Grass for Name. click Finish Sketch. 28 In the Project Browser.Grass for Name. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Topography Schedule. under Materials and Finishes.23 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Name each region Island . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. and apply the material Site . 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Site.Grass. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.Grass. 27 On the Design Bar. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . select Site . under Schedules/Quantities. click the Value for Material. 29 In the Project Browser. click Properties. under Identity Data.

30 In the Project Browser.walkway. 33 On the Design Bar. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. click Subregion. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Lines. Name the subregion Walkway. 32 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. and apply the material Concrete . Using Site Tools | 787 . double-click Site. click Finish Sketch. double-click Topography Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . under Floor Plans. 35 On the Design Bar.

NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. When you use the grading tool.rvt. Notice that the schedule has been updated. 37 On the File menu. double-click Topography Schedule. this project file is required in its current state. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. and click Save. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. under Schedules/Quantities.rvt. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. Grading the Toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. click Save As. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. there is still only one toposurface. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 36 In the Project Browser.

8 Select the topographic surface. see the tutorial. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. click Graded Region. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. under Floor Plans. 2 Select the toposurface. select Existing for Phase Created. A warning dialog box is displayed. 6 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Using Site Tools | 789 . click Modify. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Copy Internal Points. double-click Site. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. RELATED For more information regarding phasing.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 3 On the Options Bar. click . Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 5 On the Design Bar. under Phasing. and click Select and Edit. Using Phasing.

demolished. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. and new. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration.

click Model Graphics Style.11 On the View Control Bar. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and click Hidden Line. click Point. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 13 Press DELETE. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. Using Site Tools | 791 .

17 On the Design Bar. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. 20 On the View toolbar. 18 On the View toolbar. click View Properties. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. click . 19 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. click . 792 | Chapter 23 Site . click Model Graphics Style. click Finish Surface. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.

this project file is required in its current state. and delete it. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. only the original toposurface displays. Only the graded topography displays. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. Therefore.rvt. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Adding a Building Pad. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. under Floor Plans. 24 On the View menu. When you add a building pad. 3 On the Design Bar. you create a building pad. double-click Site. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Phasing. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. under Phasing. and click OK. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. click Pad. click Save. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 23 Select the toposurface. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. If you have an existing building model. the Pick Walls command is active. Using Site Tools | 793 . you can delete it. specify New Construction for Phase. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. specify Existing for Phase.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. NOTE By default. click View Properties. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. 26 On the File menu. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. and click OK. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project.

click Finish Sketch. . and click Shading with Edges. . 6 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click pad. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site .5 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the View toolbar. 7 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

5 On the Design Bar. and select the parking space. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. under Floor Plans. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. click Parking Component. Using Site Tools | 795 . 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Adding Site Components In this exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. click Modify. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. this project file is required in its current state.90 deg. Adding Site Components. click Save.9 On the File menu.

Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. click spaces. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . choose any tree type. 8 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Site Component. under Floor Plans. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. 12 In the Type Selector.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. click 9 On the View toolbar. double-click Site. . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click . 15 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click . Using Site Tools | 797 . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar.

click Tag All Not Tagged. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In the following illustration.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. click Apply. 16 On the File menu. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Site tutorial-in progress. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. double-click Site. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. this project file is required in its current state. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees.rvt. click Hidden Line. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Save. In the following exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. Tagging Site and Parking Components. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.

NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and click Add. 7 On the File menu. 6 Click the Formatting tab. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. select Mark. click the Fields tab. and click OK. 8 Under Fields. click Save. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 4 Under Available fields. Creating Parking Space Schedules. The parking schedule is displayed.rvt. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Type. If necessary. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Type. Using Site Tools | 799 . select Parking for Category. Site tutorial-in progress. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. 5 Under Available fields. this project file is required in its current state. and under Heading. and under Heading. 7 Under Fields. enter Size. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Add. enter Space. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. and click OK. select Mark. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a parking schedule.

finish numbering the remaining spaces. number the first three spaces consecutively. click Close Hidden Windows. 12 In the Site plan. 800 | Chapter 23 Site . 11 On the Window menu. 10 In the Project Browser. under Space. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. 14 In the Parking Schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. double-click Site. 15 On the File menu. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Space.9 On the Window menu. click Tile. under Floor Plans. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. click Save. under Views (all). 13 In the Parking Schedule.

and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. By grouping objects. In this tutorial. 801 . and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. For example. or with those working on a different project. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. You can also nest groups within other groups. you also simplify the modification process.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. and modify repetitive units. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. place. you not only simplify their placement. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.

You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Placing a Group. 5 On the Edit toolbar. and expand Model. and select the bed. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. name the file Grouping-in progress. click . click Open. chair. click the Training Files icon. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. classrooms. expand Views (all). you create a model group for a typical hotel room. 8 Enter Typical guest room. and click Rename. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. Open the m_Grouping. desk. 6 In the Project Browser. and two nightstands.Creating Groups In this lesson. and click Save. expand Groups. and typical office layouts. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. After you create a model group. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 Right-click Group 1. Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. and press ENTER. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room.rvt. click Save As. expand Floor Plans. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 9 On the File menu. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Group In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

select the original instance of the group. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. select the group. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. click . A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. 7 On the Edit toolbar. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. as shown.Placing a Group In this exercise. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door.rvt. Grouping-in progress. Creating Groups | 803 . click Finish.

1 In the drawing area. 2 On the Options Bar.rvt. Grouping-in progress. click Save. click Edit Group. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. Modifying a Group. you make changes to a single instance of a group. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . When you finish the editing routine. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 9 On the File menu. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. Modifying a Group In this exercise. as shown. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. Creating Nested Groups. 8 On the File menu. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. The new group is considered nested within the host group. Creating Nested Groups | 805 .The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click Save. the host group is also updated. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. 7 On the Design Bar. 3 Press and hold CTRL. and select the desk and chair. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. When you make changes to a nested group. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. click Finish Group. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click .

and click Rename. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. expand Groups. and press ENTER. right-click Group 1. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Grouping-in progress. which acts as the host.rvt. click . make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. expand Model. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. 2 On the Edit toolbar. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. 3 In the Project Browser. In the selection. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. The new group is then nested within the original group. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub.

Grouping-in progress. 3 In the drawing area. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. everything else is available for selection. verify that Multiple is clear. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the File menu. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Add To Group. When you edit the group to add the component. click Edit Group. Modifying a Nested Group. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. select the Typical toilet room group. 11 On the Design Bar. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Group. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . 2 In the Type Selector. click Save. 10 In the drawing area. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. 9 On the Options Bar. click Component. Because the modified group is nested. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group.rvt.

5 On the Design Bar. 10 In the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Modify. 7 Press TAB. click Add To Group. 11 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. and select the nested toilet room group. select the sink. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. click Finish Group.

You then place the new group in the building model. having created a group that represents a typical layout. Working with Groups. 12 On the File menu. under Groups. and click Rename. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. Grouping-in progress. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. click Save. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Lastly. In subsequent exercises.rvt. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. 13 Proceed to the next lesson.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and click Duplicate. Working with Groups | 809 . you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. and press ENTER. you add door tags to a group. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. right-click Typical guest room. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. Working with Groups In this lesson. 3 Enter Corner guest room. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. After you finish the modified group.

12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. and press DELETE. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the toilet room. 10 Press and hold CTRL. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 13 On the Design Bar. click Finish. select Corner toilet room. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. click . click Finish Group. click OK. click Remove From Group. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. click Edit Group. 11 On the Edit toolbar. to specify the group origin. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. and select the desk and chair. 16 Select the same toilet room group. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. and drag it into the corner guest room. 15 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 After a warning message displays. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. 9 On the Options Bar. select the Corner guest room group.

Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. select the Corner toilet room group. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. click Save. click . Creating a Detail Group. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. and click to specify the end point. click Finish to finish placing the group. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 29 On the File menu. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. click 26 On the Options Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. click Add To Group. 25 On the Edit toolbar. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. 18 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. past the exterior wall. for Axis. Working with Groups | 811 . click Finish Group. select the Corner guest room group. click Edit Group. 20 On the Options Bar. select the Corner guest room group. 19 In the drawing area. 23 On the Design Bar.

You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. click to add an arc leader. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 2 On the Options Bar. click Text. click Filled Region. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. click Finish Sketch. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 10 Enter Tile. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 5 On the Design Bar.rvt. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click to draw a rectangular region. Grouping-in progress.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Groups. click . it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. 12 On the Edit toolbar. Using Attached Detail Groups. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 3 On the Options Bar. and select the note and the filled region. as shown. as shown. 20 On the File menu. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Project Browser. clear Leader.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.rvt. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. and expand Detail. Because the detail group contains variables. Grouping-in progress. and click Rename. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. under Floor Plans. click Save. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 3. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. click Tag. under Floor Plans. Working with Groups | 813 . double-click Level 2. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. and press ENTER. 14 Right-click Group 1.

expand Groups. 10 Enter Door tags. and click OK. Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. press and hold CTRL. 7 On the Edit toolbar. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. click . and click Rename. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). press TAB. 9 Right-click Group 1. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. and expand Typical toilet room. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. and select the two door tags. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . expand Attached Detail. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. click Modify. click Place Detail. and press ENTER. select Door tags. 12 On the Options Bar. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. A warning dialog box is displayed.5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser.

click Browse. click OK. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box.rvg. navigate to the directory where you saved the group.rvt. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the drawing area. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. 3 Click Save. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. 5 In the New Project dialog box.rte file located in the Metric folder. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. drag it into the drawing area. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. as shown. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. click OK. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. click to draw a square. therefore.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. Grouping-in progress. Saving and Loading Groups. Working with Groups | 815 . click the Training Files icon. click Wall. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. 6 On the File menu. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. and click Open. expand Groups. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. 13 Select Typical toilet room. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click New ➤ Project. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. under Template file. select Typical toilet room. 10 On the Options Bar. click to specify the start point of the square. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. and click Open. click Save. 14 On the File menu. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. and expand Model.

15 On the File menu. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. click . you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. 1 In the drawing area. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. 14 On the Options Bar. Automatically Creating a Group. 2 On the Edit toolbar. click Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. click Finish. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. select the instance of Typical toilet room. Loaded_Group. and click Save. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. a warning dialog box is displayed. 6 On the Design Bar. Working with Groups | 817 . 7 On the File menu. click Create new group types. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. 4 In the warning dialog box. and click OK. click Close. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. click Modify. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. click Fix Groups.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

In the final lesson.Structural 25 In this tutorial. 819 . and beams to Level 1. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. After completing level 1. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. You begin by adding the structural walls. columns. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton.

rvt file located in the Metric folder.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the m_Structural. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . click the Training Files icon. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan.

DGN. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 2 On the File menu. and select Origin to origin. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . expand Views (all). 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. and double-click Level 2. go to the Project Browser. In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. Select Current view only. SAT. select Invert colors. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. click the Training Files icon. If necessary. Select All for Layers. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). click Save As.rvt. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. under Import or Link. Sketching Structural Walls. select Automatically place. to trace the initial set of structural walls. 8 On the File menu. 6 Under Positioning. After you trace the walls.dwg from the Metric folder. 7 Click Open. DXF. and select m_wall-import. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. This file is used in the next exercise. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you imported a DWG file.

and click Structural.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. Structural_tutorial. In addition. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. First. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu.200mm. Right-click the Design Bar. proceed to Step 2. click Structural Wall. 5 In the Type Selector. rather than the height. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. select Basic Wall: Generic . Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar.

specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Click . 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. In the steps that follow. Specify Level 1. and click the next line intersection. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain.6 On the Options Bar. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . 10 Move the cursor to the right. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. and click to specify the wall endpoint.

824 | Chapter 25 Structural . and double-click Level 2. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. 13 On the View toolbar. and click to complete the chain of walls. click Modify to finish the sketch. 12 On the Design Bar. in the View toolbar. click . you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. expand Floor Plans. TIP If necessary. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all).

■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. click Modify to end the wall chain. click Structural Wall. On the Options Bar. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. click . ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. 19 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 17 Using the bulleted steps below.

select Basic Wall: Generic . This is the right extent of the arc. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click Structural Wall. click Visibility/Graphics. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 26 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . This is the left extent of the arc. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. clear m_wall-import. double-click Level 2. click the Imported Categories tab. 23 Under Visibility.dwg. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. 21 On the View menu. Click to create a three-point arc. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 28 On the Options Bar.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. 25 In the Type Selector. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.200mm.

and press ENTER.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . If it is not. 32 On the Design Bar. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. enter 1500. click the value. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. click Modify. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm.

and press ENTER. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . you create the final structural walls for the project. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. Both walls are 1200 mm long. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. clear Chain. enter 1500.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. In the steps that follow. 36 On the Design Bar.

41 On the View toolbar.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. click . 40 On the Design Bar. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . click Modify.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. In this exercise. double-click Level 2. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. in its current state. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise. This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You then make minor modifications to their position.42 On the File menu. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. click Save. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. click Dimension. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

6 Move the cursor to the left. and click OK. select it. select Intersecting Walls. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. the Options button becomes available. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar.4 On the Options Bar. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. click Options to specify the wall pick options. click Modify. On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. and click to place the dimension as shown. and when it highlights. After you select Entire Walls. Select Entire Walls for Pick. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall.

Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. 11 Click the temporary dimension value. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B.

several different beam types. 13 On the File menu. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. click Save. This project file is required. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. In the next lesson. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. joists. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. you add structural columns. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. 12 On the Edit menu. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. click Undo Edit dimension length. in its current state. In this exercise.

If necessary. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. Structural_tutorial. select Height. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. click Structural Column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. In addition.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. TIP When adding the column. and Level 2. double-click Level 1. 2 On the View menu. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. under Floor Plans.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. zoom in to place the column. you use the grid intersection tool. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . 4 In the Type Selector. and you place a column outside of the grids. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 5 On the Options Bar.

and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and C5.7 Add similar columns to C2. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. and select grids 1-5. 9 Use a crossing selection. TIP To create the crossing selection. click Grid Intersection. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . C3. and A.

Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . This completes this set of columns. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 14 If necessary. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. Columns A3-5 are shown below. zoom out until you can see all the grids. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. click Finish.

click Modify. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Grid Intersection. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. click Finish. click Modify. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. 19 On the Options Bar. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. 24 On the Design Bar. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. B3-5 are shown below. click Structural Column. 20 On the Design Bar. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5.

Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. you used various methods to add structural columns. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Floor Plans. As you use the beam tool. In the next exercise. you add structural beams to the building model.25 On the View toolbar. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. in its current state. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. expand Views (all). 26 On the File menu. Structural_tutorial. 2 On the View menu. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. click . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This project file is required. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. click Save. click Beam. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. you add beams manually.

TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown.7. and then move the cursor up to grid A. 10 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. click Modify. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. 11 On the Options Bar. click Beam. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 .7 On the Design Bar.

select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural . For example. if a beam is joined column-to-column.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. When you use the grid tool to place beams. 14 On the Options Bar. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. Use the following table for other conditions. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. click Grid.

19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. 23 On the Options Bar. click Beam. enter 8200. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 21 On the Design Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click Grid. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 18 On the Design Bar. click the temporary dimension value. click Modify. click Finish.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 22 In the Type Selector. 24 Select grid 3. 17 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. press and hold CTRL. and select grid C.

refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. select Girder. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. Click column B5 to add the first beam. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. click Finish. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. select Chain.Notice beams are added between columns. and for Usage. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. In addition. Press ESC to end the chain. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural .

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 .29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. You can also use the shortcut key. click Finish. 34 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. Press ESC to end the chain. to snap only to intersections. click Grid. Press ESC to end the chain. 33 Select grid A. 30 On the Options Bar. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. SI. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. select Girder for Usage. connecting the column at B4.

click Finish. click . 39 On the View toolbar. 36 On the Options Bar.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam had crossed grid A. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 38 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. If the W310x32. 37 Select grid B.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly.

select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 46 Move the cursor to the right. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 48 On the View toolbar. 43 In the Type Selector. 44 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 47 On the Design Bar. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. click Modify. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. select Girder for Usage. click Beam. click . Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. In the steps that follow.

and click when it intersects grid 2. select Girder. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. for Usage. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Beam. 52 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 2. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. In the steps that follow. 53 On the Options Bar. and select Chain. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

and click when it intersects grid 1. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. 57 On the View toolbar.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 . click .

rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Beam. In this exercise. You then create a joist array. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. Structural Framing. you add joists. This project file is required. In the next exercise. You also add joists and purlins to the building model.7. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists.58 On the File menu. and purlins to the building model. click W310x32. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. under Families. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. in its current state. For example. Adding Joists and Purlins. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. M_W-Wide Flange. click Save. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. 2 Zoom around the A1 . double-click Level 2. Structural_tutorial. 4 In the Project Browser. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.B3 quadrants. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

In addition. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu. click Modify. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist.6 On the Design Bar. 8 With the beam selected. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. click Array. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK. 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. click on the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . This value was set automatically because when you created the beam.

Make sure the cursor is over grid A.12 On the Options Bar. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number. Once the direction is set. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Select 2nd for Move to. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections.

18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. 17 Add a W310x32.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .

and color within the Object Styles dialog box.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 20 On the Edit menu. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . This is the array start point. click Array. joists. and click. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. Enter 7 for Number. and purlins. Select 2nd for Move to. Clear Group and Associate. 21 On the Options Bar. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . style.

clear all options except Structural Framing. and click OK. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 26 In the Filter dialog box. click . 25 On the Options Bar. click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 27 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 .

In this exercise. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. 29 On the Design Bar. 31 On the File menu. in its current state. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . click . and notice the connection symbols display. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. you create new levels. 30 On the View toolbar. In the next lesson. This project file is required. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. click Modify. click Save. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions.

select Make Plan View. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. expand Elevations. Click to add Level 3. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Level. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you create several new levels. 5 On the Options Bar.Defining New Levels In this exercise. under Views (all). These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. You need at least 3 meters of space. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. 2 Select grid 1. and double-click Building Elevation. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2.

7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. This project file is required. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. in its current state. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . Structural_tutorial. click Save. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. you created three new levels. In this exercise. click . to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 8 On the File menu. Duplicating the Existing Design.In the Project Browser. Each level is 3000 mm high.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.

click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 3 On the Edit menu. click Copy to Clipboard.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. click OK. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. select Level 2. click Modify. Make sure the entire building model is included. 5 On the Edit menu. press and hold CTRL. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 8 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select Levels 3 and 4. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box.

10 On the File menu. click Save. in its current state. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. This project file is required. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the next lesson. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. double-click Building Elevation. In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. you create a framing elevation.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson.

make sure Attach to Grid is selected. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . 5 On the Design Bar. click Framing Elevation. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You can now view the new elevation. in the Project Browser. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Elevation 1-a. 3 On the Options Bar. Structural_tutorial. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3.

You then array the braces to the remaining levels. in its current state. In this exercise. This project file is required. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . you add c-channel bracing to the building model. In the next exercise. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add structural braces to the building model. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. You are ready to add the structural braces. Structural_tutorial. 7 On the File menu. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Adding Structural Braces. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial.Notice the stick framing representation.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save.

and using the shape grips. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . you use point-to-point insertion.4. select the view crop box. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. click Brace. NOTE If necessary. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. When adding the braces.

7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.The brace displays. Enter 4 for Number. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. click Array. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. The second brace is displayed. Select Constrain. Select 2nd for Move to. 10 On the Edit menu. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Clear Group and Associate. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 862 | Chapter 25 Structural .

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 16 On the View toolbar. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Tag All Not Tagged. click . select Structural Framing Tags. and click OK.

17 On the File menu. click Save. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural . you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise.

They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. such as walls. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. however. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. and so on. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. 865 . In this tutorial. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. All other team members can view this workset. Using Worksharing. they cannot make changes to it. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. stairs. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. called Worksharing. doors. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. floors. A workset is a collection of building elements. You can enable Worksharing for any project. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.

use Element Borrowing. select the desired workset. such as a tenant interior. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. In a multi-story structure. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. such as annotations and dimensions. Working in a shared project In a shared project. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. In the lessons and exercises that follow. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Elements specific to a view. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. When setting up Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In the next exercise. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you can select which worksets are open or closed. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you specify an active workset. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . To make a workset editable. and click Editable. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. Instead. After the project is shared. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you must first enable Worksharing. After learning the fundamentals. go to the Worksets dialog box. The first time you activate worksets within a project. When you are working on a shared project.

the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. As new members create worksets for their own use. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. for a typical project. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Generally. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. the file is saved as the central file. You should have at least one workset for each person. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. if a workset named Interior was created. designers work in teams. and View worksets. On this tab. not including the Project Standards. Experience has shown that. ■ Team member roles Typically. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Therefore. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. When creating the new worksets. For example. In most projects. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Shared Levels and Grids. Regardless of the default setting. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. with each assigned a specific functional task. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. When you create a new workset.

You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This makes them available to other team members. within the local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. When working remotely. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. When finished or at regular intervals. you work no differently then you would in the office. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. This is called “Selective Open. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. proceeds as usual. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. On the Options Bar. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. After saving to the central file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. When you save to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. your changes are saved. you can select which workset is active. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. however. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. However. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. As you work. if you know who checked out the required workset. When you save to the central file. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. When you save locally (to your local file). save to the central file. you make that workset editable by you. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. and then save the local file. you should then save to your local file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. In this situation. In this instance. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. make any required worksets editable. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project.

Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. click the Training Files icon. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. In the next exercise. reload the latest changes from the central file. and make that workset editable. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. To do this. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. Open the c_Worksets.rvt file located in the Common folder. for instance. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you should check out the Materials workset. click Open." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. using VPN. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. In this conceptual exercise. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. click Worksets. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. Alternatively. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 .

another is assigned the interior layout. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. In this simple training project. imagine four users including yourself. In this case. currently named Workset1. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Your username displays as the present owner. click New. Only User-Created worksets should display. Therefore. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. select Workset1. Because the interior walls appear in many views. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. For training purposes. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. you can rename the default workset. and click OK. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. and notice all are editable by you. clear Visible by default in all views. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 6 Under Show. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. 10 Click New. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. 9 Click OK. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . under Show. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and Views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. turn off Families. 13 Click Rename. it is better to make them visible by default. a small number of team members are working on the building model.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. Project Standards. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so.

18 On the Options Bar. click OK. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. and double-click Level 1. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Identity Data. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. click . When you initially activate Worksharing. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner.14 In the Rename dialog box. 20 Click OK. stairs. type the name Exterior Shell. and walls. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 Select one of the interior walls. expand Floor Plans. and click OK. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . expand Views (all). In this training file. 24 Select all of the interior elements. You do. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. however. under Identity Data. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. click . Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. 22 On the Options Bar. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 17 In the drawing area. including the interior doors. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. 15 In the Worksets dialog box.

You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. click . If any interior elements remain. under Identity Data. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. under Identity Data. and click OK. 27 On the View menu. 33 Select Interior Layout. select Interior Layout for Workset. under Views (all). The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible.25 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 30 Click OK. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. select all of the interior elements of the building model. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 35 In the drawing area. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. 31 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click the Worksets tab. and click OK. 34 In the Project Browser. select Interior Layout for Workset. 36 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. click Save As.

make sure you remember the location of this central file. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. click Close. select the central file and.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. click Open. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. click Save As. You have created a local file which is for your use only. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. select Specify. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 3 Click Open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click Save. and click OK. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. check out worksets. 5 On the File menu. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. click Worksets. select all the User-Created worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. click Options. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. you enabled Worksharing on a project. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. make modifications to the building model. please do so before continuing. 44 Click OK. In this exercise. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Non Editable. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. you create your local file. Next. 2 In the Open dialog box. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. 6 In the Save As dialog box. and click OK. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. Now that you have created the central file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . 40 Click Save. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 39 In the Save As dialog box. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. under Open Worksets. In addition. click Worksets. 45 On the File menu. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. If you have not yet completed the exercise.

select Interior Layout. If it was owned by another user. 20 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. On the Options Bar. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and click OK. 23 Click OK. click Modify. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. expand Floor Plans. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. Before working on the model. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. and select Yes for Editable. Because this element is not owned by another user. and double-click Level 1. 22 On the File menu. click Worksets. Verify that it is cleared. click . expand Views (all). Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 11 Click OK. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. 12 On the Window menu. In this case. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. you can still edit this wall. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 14 In the Project Browser. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 21 Click OK. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. select Interior Layout for Name. click . under Identity Data.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. however. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. If this is selected. In this case. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. In the Worksets dialog box. 19 Under Constraints. notice the Editable Only option. The upper exterior wall should still be selected.

33 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall: Interior . 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. 30 On the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. 25 Delete the door. The precise location is not important. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Selector. and modify the length so that the corridor is open.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. click Wall.126mm Partition (2-hr). 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Modify. click Door. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 .

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. you created your local file. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. In addition. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. By default. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. save to central. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). each user must check out worksets. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Borrowed Elements is selected. a tooltip. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. You modified the building model. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. two users access the central file through a network connection. In the following section of this exercise. you should perform regular saves. At the end of a work session. For training purposes. If you have not yet completed these exercises. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. it is recommended. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Throughout the process. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In this particular case.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. In this exercise. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you should relinquish all worksets. Whenever you save. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. and proceed to Creating a local copy. skip the following section. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. displays the workset as well as the element type. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. which matches the information in the Status Bar. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. checked out worksets. make elements editable. and save locally immediately afterward. When working in your local file. please do so before continuing. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. click Save to Central. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. and reload the latest changes. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. leave this file open in its current state. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise.

and reset the Username to your computer login name. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click OK. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network.rvt. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 16 Click OK. 14 On the File menu. instructions are staggered. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 3 On the Settings menu. specifically sequenced. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 11 In the Save As dialog box. select Specify. In addition. click Options. You now have a local copy of the project. click Worksets. select the central file and. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . and click OK. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. select all the User-Created worksets. User 2: Create a local file. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. For training purposes.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. and click OK. under Open Worksets. click Options. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. and click Save. consider that person to be User 1. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. 4 Click the General Tab and. enter User 2. 7 In the Open dialog box. and select Yes for Editable. click Save As. This is a system setting. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. You are now the owner of that workset. 8 Click Open. This file is for your use only. under Username. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. click Open. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. one user has already created a local file. 10 On the File menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. return to the Settings dialog box. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset.

and select Yes for Editable. click Save to Central. modify the building model. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 18 On the File menu. 22 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. select the lower exterior wall. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . expand Views (all). User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. click Worksets. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. If you only have one workset checked out. expand Views (all). 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. open it now. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. it becomes the active workset. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. and double-click Level 1. If it is not open. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. and double-click Level 1. 23 In the Project Browser. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. expand Floor Plans. expand Floor Plans. 28 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 26 On the File menu.User 1: Check out worksets. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box.

Therefore. 47 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. User 1: Reload latest worksets. and click inside any room. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. Click Yes. 32 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. choose any desk. and click Rename. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. 42 On the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. click Reload Latest. However. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 34 Click OK. 40 On the File menu. click the Worksets tab. 38 Click OK. and click OK. select Yes for Editable. click Save to Central. 48 On the Design Bar. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. click Component. and click OK. the Visible by default option was not selected. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. click Worksets. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . under Floor Plans. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. click Modify. 41 Select Furniture Layout. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 43 On the Project Browser. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 36 On the File menu.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. The changes User 2 made are apparent. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. click Visibility/Graphics. When you save to central. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. Before adding any furniture. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. click Save to Central. 49 On the View menu. under Views (all). 45 On the Project Browser. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate.

User 1: Reload latest. click Reload Latest. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. 69 On the File menu. Checking out worksets. 59 In the Rename dialog box. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 65 On the File menu. modified the building model. click Save to Central. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. select Project Standards. click Edit/New. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. Each user checked out worksets. and click Properties. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. 64 Click OK. two users worked on the same building model using worksets.52 On the File menu. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click OK. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 61 On the File menu. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. select the following. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. under Show. and click OK. leave this file open in its current state.200mm. click Save to Central. 60 Click OK twice. and published their changes back to the central file. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. select Reload Latest. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. In the final exercise of this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. click Rename. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Save to Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. enter Exterior Wall . and save 68 On the File menu. click Worksets. 54 Click OK. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box.

You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. In subsequent steps. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 3 In the Save As dialog box. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Each user must have network access to the central file. and click Save. select Make this the Central location after save. click Options. As each of you work. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. click Options. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. and these problems are rectified. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. you save the dataset as a central file. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. At the appropriate point in this exercise. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. click the Training Files icon. click Options. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. This is the local file for User 1. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. click Save As. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. finished the previous workset exercises. click Open. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 7 On the File menu. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2).rvt file located in the Common folder. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. 9 In the Save As dialog box. On the Settings menu. you need to set up your central and local files. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and still have your local files open. Set the Username to User 2. There are specific instructions for each user. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. This exercise requires two users and. 5 Click Save. click Save As. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. throughout this training. The central file should still be open.

and click OK. click Worksets. In addition. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. This is a system setting. Afterwards. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Open. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. select Specify. double-click Level 1.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. if any User-Created worksets are not open. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. select the Interior Layout workset. 15 Click Open. 30 On the Options Bar. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. and then click OK. return to the Settings dialog box. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. select them. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. select the second window from the top. Next. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. 25 Under Active Workset. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Worksets. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 31 On the left exterior wall. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. and then click OK. and select Yes for Editable. 18 In the Save As dialog box. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 17 On the File menu. and click Save. 14 In the Open dialog box. 13 On the File menu. select Exterior Shell. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and click Open. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. 28 Under Active Workset. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Interior Layout. click Options. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You are now the owner of that workset. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. select the central file and under Open Worksets.

User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. click the File menu. At this point. click Check Now. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. and notice the window is in the new location.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 37 Click Close. 39 Click OK. select the request submitted by User 2. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. 35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. After you submit the request. A message informs you that your request has been granted. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . 36 Click Grant. and click Editing Requests.

In this case. and close 40 On the File menu.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. to Local. In this multi-user exercise. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. select Save to Central. select the following. you requested permission to edit the element. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and the other user granted it. click Close. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user.

These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 885 . you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. Using design options. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. In this tutorial.Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model.

click Open. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can edit it. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. Open the m_Urban_House. In the second exercise. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you set up multiple design option sets. For example. the only available command is to create a new option set. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. After you and the client agree on the final design. click New. In this particular case.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. At any time in the design process. under Option Set. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. you design each of the structural options. and delete the unwanted options from the project. With the second option. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.rvt file located in the Metric folder. After you create a design option. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. In the final exercise of this lesson. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. In addition. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. The client has asked you to create various options. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. In the first exercise in this lesson. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. you can have multiple sets of design options. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. click the Training Files icon. each with multiple design options. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. make your final design decision.

you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). 4 In the Project Browser. click 12 On the Options Bar. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 5 On the View menu. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. click Modify.TIP In this exercise. click Edit Selected. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. click Column. add three columns. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. In this case. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. the roof and structure systems must work together. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. each is constructed for interchangeability. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. 9 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. and click Close. therefore. select: ■ ■ ■ . or add a dimension string between the columns. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. TIP To center the middle column. In the following illustration. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. expand Views (all). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and the third column centered between the two. By selecting Multiple. 11 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected.

A copy of the three selected columns is added. they are difficult to see in this view. 18 On the View toolbar. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . using the same technique. 17 Zoom out and. Because of the size of the columns. When you are finished.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. Notice the 12 columns that you added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. click . 16 Zoom in around the notch construction.

24 Select the Beam you added previously. double-click TOP OF CORE. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Round Bar : 50mm. In it. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. Zoom in on the upper right column. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click . 19 In the Project Browser. 23 On the Design Bar. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. click Modify. 21 In the Type Selector. The second click specifies the end of the beam. click Beam. under Floor Plans. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. you add the beams that span the columns. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . Use the following illustration as a guide. 25 On the Edit toolbar.Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. move down to the next set of columns. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 28 Zoom out. and select the center of the column to add a copy. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. and click the center point.26 On the Options Bar. 30 On the View toolbar. click . zoom into the left column.

and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. 40 In the Rename dialog box. enter Brackets for New.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click New. under Option. not a new option set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. enter Beam for New. click Rename. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . under Option. 36 In the Rename dialog box. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Rename. enter Structure for New. under Option Set. and click OK. under Option. 38 In the Rename dialog box. and click OK. 33 Click Finish Editing. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary).

43 In the Rename dialog box. and click OK. it will resemble the following illustration. This allows you to more easily manage the project. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 47 Under Roofing. and click OK. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. 45 Under Roofing. There should now be two roofing design options. click Rename. click New. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . name the option Louvers. select Option 2. select Beam. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. click New. enter Roofing for New. under Option Set. name the option Sunscreen. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. and click OK. you create the second design option. 46 Under Option. under Option. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. When finished. 41 Under Option Set. 52 Click Close. click Rename. select Option 1 (primary). click Rename. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. 51 Under Edit. 48 Under Option.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. under Structure. select Edit Selected. Under Now Editing.

53 In the Project Browser. click Component. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. The second click represents the plane that is moved. 56 In the Type Selector. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. click Align. 58 On the Tools menu. under Floor Plans. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . Refer to the following illustration. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. double-click ROOF TERRACE. select M_Roof Beam.

The second click represents the move end point. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks.60 After aligning the beam. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click Modify. on the Edit toolbar. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. The first click sets the move start point. 62 Select the beam and. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. Click to indicate the end point of the move.

rvt. 68 In the Design Options dialog box. click . each with multiple design options to pick from. you set up multiple d